mir/postfix
2
0
Fork 0
mirror of https://github.com/vdukhovni/postfix synced 2025-08-22 09:57:34 +00:00
Code Issues Releases Wiki Activity

postfix-3.10-20240930

Browse Source
This commit is contained in:
Wietse Z Venema 2024-09-30 00:00:00 -05:00 committed by Viktor Dukhovni
parent f57aaf90a7
commit a269182156
76 changed files with 910 additions and 897 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

15
postfix/HISTORY
View File

@ -28322,9 +28322,22 @@ Apologies for any names omitted.
case with lower case, and after replacing spaces with
underscores. File: mantools/man2html.
Cleanaup (no code change): regenerate all man-style pages
Cleanup (no code change): regenerate all man-style pages
so that the parameter summaries at the end match the text
in postconf(5). This also updates embedded man-style
comments in Postfix source code. Files: mantools/man2html,
proto/aliases, cleanup/cleanup.c, local/local.c, smtpd/smtpd.c,
tlsproxy/tlsproxy.c.
20240930
Bugfix (defect introduced: Postfix 2.9, date 20111218):
with "smtpd_sasl_auth_enable = no", info received with
XCLIENT LOGIN was ignored by permit_sasl_authenticated.
Problem reported by Antonin Verrier. The fix was to REMOVE
a test and to rely solely on the sasl_mechanism property
which is always null when a remote SMTP client is not
authenticated. File: src/smtpd/smtpd_check.c.
Cleanup (no code change): regenerated HTML manpages that
weren't updated because of a simplistic make(1) dependency.

36
postfix/html/access.5.html
View File

@ -7,17 +7,17 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
ACCESS(5) ACCESS(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
access - Postfix SMTP server access table
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap /etc/postfix/access</b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" /etc/postfix/access</b>
<b>postmap -q - /etc/postfix/access</b> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
This document describes access control on remote SMTP client informa-
tion: host names, network addresses, and envelope sender or recipient
addresses; it is implemented by the Postfix SMTP server. See
@ -39,13 +39,13 @@ ACCESS(5) ACCESS(5)
a slightly different way as described below under "REGULAR EXPRESSION
TABLES" or "TCP-BASED TABLES".
<b>CASE FOLDING</b>
<b><a name="case_folding">CASE FOLDING</a></b>
The search string is folded to lowercase before database lookup. As of
Postfix 2.3, the search string is not case folded with database types
such as <a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp</a>: or <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>: whose lookup fields can match both upper and
lower case.
<b>TABLE FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="table_format">TABLE FORMAT</a></b>
The input format for the <a href="postmap.1.html"><b>postmap</b>(1)</a> command is as follows:
<i>pattern action</i>
@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ ACCESS(5) ACCESS(5)
A logical line starts with non-whitespace text. A line that
starts with whitespace continues a logical line.
<b>EMAIL ADDRESS PATTERNS IN INDEXED TABLES</b>
<b><a name="email_address_patterns_in_indexed_tables">EMAIL ADDRESS PATTERNS IN INDEXED TABLES</a></b>
With lookups from indexed files such as DB or DBM, or from networked
tables such as NIS, LDAP or SQL, patterns are tried in the order as
listed below:
@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ ACCESS(5) ACCESS(5)
addresses. The value is specified with the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#smtpd_null_access_lookup_key">smtpd_null_access_lookup_key</a></b>
parameter in the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> file.
<b>EMAIL ADDRESS EXTENSION</b>
<b><a name="email_address_extension">EMAIL ADDRESS EXTENSION</a></b>
When a mail address localpart contains the optional recipient delimiter
(e.g., <i>user+foo</i>@<i>domain</i>), the lookup order becomes: <i>user+foo</i>@<i>domain</i>,
<i>user</i>@<i>domain</i>, <i>domain</i>, <i>user+foo</i>@, and <i>user</i>@.
@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ ACCESS(5) ACCESS(5)
IPv6 support is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.
<b>ACCEPT ACTIONS</b>
<b><a name="accept_actions">ACCEPT ACTIONS</a></b>
<b>OK</b> Accept the address etc. that matches the pattern.
<i>all-numerical</i>
@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ ACCESS(5) ACCESS(5)
For other accept actions, see "OTHER ACTIONS" below.
<b>REJECT ACTIONS</b>
<b><a name="reject_actions">REJECT ACTIONS</a></b>
Postfix version 2.3 and later support enhanced status codes as defined
in <a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3463">RFC 3463</a>. When no code is specified at the beginning of the <i>text</i>
below, Postfix inserts a default enhanced status code of "5.7.1" in the
@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ ACCESS(5) ACCESS(5)
For other reject actions, see "OTHER ACTIONS" below.
<b>OTHER ACTIONS</b>
<b><a name="other_actions">OTHER ACTIONS</a></b>
<i>restriction...</i>
Apply the named UCE restriction(s) (<b>permit</b>, <b>reject</b>,
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#reject_unauth_destination">reject_unauth_destination</a></b>, and so on).
@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ ACCESS(5) ACCESS(5)
This feature is available in Postfix 2.1 and later.
<b>ENHANCED STATUS CODES</b>
<b><a name="enhanced_status_codes">ENHANCED STATUS CODES</a></b>
Postfix version 2.3 and later support enhanced status codes as defined
in <a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3463">RFC 3463</a>. When an enhanced status code is specified in an access
table, it is subject to modification. The following transformations are
@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ ACCESS(5) ACCESS(5)
Postfix SMTP server will transform a sender or recipient DSN
status into a generic non-address DSN status (e.g., 4.0.0).
<b>REGULAR EXPRESSION TABLES</b>
<b><a name="regular_expression_tables">REGULAR EXPRESSION TABLES</a></b>
This section describes how the table lookups change when the table is
given in the form of regular expressions. For a description of regular
expression lookup table syntax, see <a href="regexp_table.5.html"><b>regexp_table</b>(5)</a> or <a href="pcre_table.5.html"><b>pcre_table</b>(5)</a>.
@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ ACCESS(5) ACCESS(5)
feature that parenthesized substrings from the pattern can be interpo-
lated as <b>$1</b>, <b>$2</b> and so on.
<b>TCP-BASED TABLES</b>
<b><a name="tcp-based_tables">TCP-BASED TABLES</a></b>
This section describes how the table lookups change when lookups are
directed to a TCP-based server. For a description of the TCP
client/server lookup protocol, see <a href="tcp_table.5.html"><b>tcp_table</b>(5)</a>. This feature is not
@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ ACCESS(5) ACCESS(5)
Actions are the same as with indexed file lookups.
<b>EXAMPLE</b>
<b><a name="example">EXAMPLE</a></b>
The following example uses an indexed file, so that the order of table
entries does not matter. The example permits access by the client at
address 1.2.3.4 but rejects all other clients in 1.2.3.0/24. Instead of
@ -412,20 +412,20 @@ ACCESS(5) ACCESS(5)
Execute the command "<b>postmap /etc/postfix/access</b>" after editing the
file.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
The table format does not understand quoting conventions.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<a href="smtpd.8.html">smtpd(8)</a>, SMTP server
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="transport.5.html">transport(5)</a>, transport:nexthop syntax
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="SMTPD_ACCESS_README.html">SMTPD_ACCESS_README</a>, built-in SMTP server access control
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

30
postfix/html/anvil.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
ANVIL(8) ANVIL(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
anvil - Postfix session count and request rate control
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>anvil</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix <a href="anvil.8.html"><b>anvil</b>(8)</a> server maintains statistics about client connec-
tion counts or client request rates. This information can be used to
defend against clients that hammer a server with either too many simul-
@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ ANVIL(8) ANVIL(8)
<b>status=0</b>
<b>MESSAGE RATE CONTROL</b>
<b><a name="message_rate_control">MESSAGE RATE CONTROL</a></b>
To register a message delivery request send the following request to
the <a href="anvil.8.html"><b>anvil</b>(8)</a> server:
@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ ANVIL(8) ANVIL(8)
<b>status=0</b>
<b>rate=</b><i>number</i>
<b>RECIPIENT RATE CONTROL</b>
<b><a name="recipient_rate_control">RECIPIENT RATE CONTROL</a></b>
To register a recipient request send the following request to the
<a href="anvil.8.html"><b>anvil</b>(8)</a> server:
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ ANVIL(8) ANVIL(8)
<b>status=0</b>
<b>rate=</b><i>number</i>
<b>TLS SESSION NEGOTIATION RATE CONTROL</b>
<b><a name="tls_session_negotiation_rate_control">TLS SESSION NEGOTIATION RATE CONTROL</a></b>
The features described in this section are available with Postfix 2.3
and later.
@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ ANVIL(8) ANVIL(8)
<b>status=0</b>
<b>rate=</b><i>number</i>
<b>AUTH RATE CONTROL</b>
<b><a name="auth_rate_control">AUTH RATE CONTROL</a></b>
To register an AUTH request send the following request to the <a href="anvil.8.html"><b>anvil</b>(8)</a>
server:
@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ ANVIL(8) ANVIL(8)
<b>status=0</b>
<b>rate=</b><i>number</i>
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="anvil.8.html"><b>anvil</b>(8)</a> server does not talk to the network or to local users, and
can run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ ANVIL(8) ANVIL(8)
clients. To reduce memory usage, reduce the time unit over which state
is kept.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
Upon exit, and every <b><a href="postconf.5.html#anvil_status_update_time">anvil_status_update_time</a></b> seconds, the server logs
@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ ANVIL(8) ANVIL(8)
In order to avoid unnecessary overhead, no measurements are done for
activity that isn't concurrency limited or rate limited.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
Systems behind network address translating routers or proxies appear to
have the same client address and can run into connection count and/or
rate limits falsely.
@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ ANVIL(8) ANVIL(8)
service should always register connect/disconnect events even when it
does not explicitly limit them.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
On low-traffic mail systems, changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automati-
cally as <a href="anvil.8.html"><b>anvil</b>(8)</a> processes run for only a limited amount of time. On
other mail systems, use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>" to speed up a
@ -214,18 +214,18 @@ ANVIL(8) ANVIL(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#service_name">service_name</a> (read-only)</b>
The <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> service name of a Postfix daemon process.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="smtpd.8.html">smtpd(8)</a>, Postfix SMTP server
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="master.5.html">master(5)</a>, generic daemon options
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="TUNING_README.html">TUNING_README</a>, performance tuning
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
The anvil service is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

20
postfix/html/bounce.5.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
BOUNCE(5) BOUNCE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
bounce - Postfix bounce message template format
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#bounce_template_file">bounce_template_file</a> = /etc/postfix/bounce.cf</b>
<b>postconf -b</b> [<i>template</i><b>_</b><i>file</i>]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix <a href="bounce.8.html"><b>bounce</b>(8)</a> server produces delivery status notification
(DSN) messages for undeliverable mail, delayed mail, successful deliv-
ery or address verification requests.
@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ BOUNCE(5) BOUNCE(5)
plate file, followed by the specific details of bounce template for-
mats.
<b>GENERAL PROCEDURE</b>
<b><a name="general_procedure">GENERAL PROCEDURE</a></b>
To create a customized bounce template file, create a temporary copy of
the file <b>/etc/postfix/bounce.cf.default</b> and edit the temporary file.
@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ BOUNCE(5) BOUNCE(5)
/etc/postfix/<a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>:
<a href="postconf.5.html#bounce_template_file">bounce_template_file</a> = /etc/postfix/bounce.cf
<b>TEMPLATE FILE FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="template_file_format">TEMPLATE FILE FORMAT</a></b>
The template file can specify templates for failed mail, delayed mail,
successful delivery or for address verification. These templates are
named <b>failure_template</b>, <b>delay_template</b>, <b>success_template</b> and <b>ver-</b>
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ BOUNCE(5) BOUNCE(5)
Examples of all templates can be found in the file <b>bounce.cf.default</b> in
the Postfix configuration directory.
<b>TEMPLATE HEADER FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="template_header_format">TEMPLATE HEADER FORMAT</a></b>
The first portion of a bounce template consists of optional template
headers. Some become message headers in the delivery status notifica-
tion; some control the formatting of that notification. Headers not
@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ BOUNCE(5) BOUNCE(5)
<b>o</b> Template message headers must contain ASCII characters only, and
must not contain ASCII null characters.
<b>TEMPLATE MESSAGE TEXT FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="template_message_text_format">TEMPLATE MESSAGE TEXT FORMAT</a></b>
The second portion of a bounce template consists of message text. As
the above example shows, template message text may contain <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>
$parameters. Besides the parameters that are defined in <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>, the
@ -180,14 +180,14 @@ BOUNCE(5) BOUNCE(5)
needed because Postfix appends ASCII text after the message tem-
plate when it sends a delivery status notification.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="bounce.8.html">bounce(8)</a>, Postfix delivery status notifications
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
The Postfix bounce template format was originally developed by Nicolas
Riendeau.

18
postfix/html/bounce.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
bounce - Postfix delivery status reports
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>bounce</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="bounce.8.html"><b>bounce</b>(8)</a> daemon maintains per-message log files with delivery sta-
tus information. Each log file is named after the queue file that it
corresponds to, and is kept in a queue subdirectory named after the
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
This is used by clients that cannot retry transactions by themselves,
and that depend on retry logic in their own client.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc822">RFC 822</a> (ARPA Internet Text Messages)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2045">RFC 2045</a> (Format of Internet Message Bodies)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2822">RFC 2822</a> (Internet Message Format)
@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6532">RFC 6532</a> (Internationalized Message Format)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6533">RFC 6533</a> (Internationalized Delivery Status Notifications)
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automatically, as <a href="bounce.8.html"><b>bounce</b>(8)</a> processes
run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>"
to speed up a change.
@ -166,12 +166,12 @@ BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#header_from_format">header_from_format</a> (standard)</b>
The format of the Postfix-generated <b>From:</b> header.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix/bounce/* non-delivery records
/var/spool/postfix/defer/* non-delivery records
/var/spool/postfix/trace/* delivery status records
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="bounce.5.html">bounce(5)</a>, bounce message template format
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

30
postfix/html/canonical.5.html
View File

@ -7,17 +7,17 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
CANONICAL(5) CANONICAL(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
canonical - Postfix canonical table format
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap /etc/postfix/canonical</b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" /etc/postfix/canonical</b>
<b>postmap -q - /etc/postfix/canonical</b> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The optional <a href="canonical.5.html"><b>canonical</b>(5)</a> table specifies an address mapping for local
and non-local addresses. The mapping is used by the <a href="cleanup.8.html"><b>cleanup</b>(8)</a> daemon,
before mail is stored into the queue. The address mapping is recur-
@ -59,13 +59,13 @@ CANONICAL(5) CANONICAL(5)
port or with <a href="ADDRESS_REWRITING_README.html#aliases">local aliasing</a>. To change the destination but not the
headers, use the <a href="virtual.5.html"><b>virtual</b>(5)</a> or <a href="aliases.5.html"><b>aliases</b>(5)</a> map instead.
<b>CASE FOLDING</b>
<b><a name="case_folding">CASE FOLDING</a></b>
The search string is folded to lowercase before database lookup. As of
Postfix 2.3, the search string is not case folded with database types
such as <a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp</a>: or <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>: whose lookup fields can match both upper and
lower case.
<b>TABLE FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="table_format">TABLE FORMAT</a></b>
The input format for the <a href="postmap.1.html"><b>postmap</b>(1)</a> command is as follows:
<i>pattern address</i>
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ CANONICAL(5) CANONICAL(5)
A logical line starts with non-whitespace text. A line that
starts with whitespace continues a logical line.
<b>TABLE SEARCH ORDER</b>
<b><a name="table_search_order">TABLE SEARCH ORDER</a></b>
With lookups from indexed files such as DB or DBM, or from networked
tables such as NIS, LDAP or SQL, each <i>user</i>@<i>domain</i> query produces a
sequence of query patterns as described below.
@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ CANONICAL(5) CANONICAL(5)
In the above example, Postfix may contact a remote server if the
recipient is rewritten to a remote address.
<b>RESULT ADDRESS REWRITING</b>
<b><a name="result_address_rewriting">RESULT ADDRESS REWRITING</a></b>
The lookup result is subject to address rewriting:
<b>o</b> When the result has the form @<i>otherdomain</i>, the result becomes
@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ CANONICAL(5) CANONICAL(5)
<b>o</b> When "<b><a href="postconf.5.html#append_dot_mydomain">append_dot_mydomain</a>=yes</b>", append "<b>.$<a href="postconf.5.html#mydomain">mydomain</a></b>" to addresses
without ".domain".
<b>ADDRESS EXTENSION</b>
<b><a name="address_extension">ADDRESS EXTENSION</a></b>
When a mail address localpart contains the optional recipient delimiter
(e.g., <i>user+foo</i>@<i>domain</i>), the lookup order becomes: <i>user+foo</i>@<i>domain</i>,
<i>user</i>@<i>domain</i>, <i>user+foo</i>, <i>user</i>, and @<i>domain</i>.
@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ CANONICAL(5) CANONICAL(5)
unmatched address extension (<i>+foo</i>) is propagated to the result of table
lookup.
<b>REGULAR EXPRESSION TABLES</b>
<b><a name="regular_expression_tables">REGULAR EXPRESSION TABLES</a></b>
This section describes how the table lookups change when the table is
given in the form of regular expressions. For a description of regular
expression lookup table syntax, see <a href="regexp_table.5.html"><b>regexp_table</b>(5)</a> or <a href="pcre_table.5.html"><b>pcre_table</b>(5)</a>.
@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ CANONICAL(5) CANONICAL(5)
feature that parenthesized substrings from the pattern can be interpo-
lated as <b>$1</b>, <b>$2</b> and so on.
<b>TCP-BASED TABLES</b>
<b><a name="tcp-based_tables">TCP-BASED TABLES</a></b>
This section describes how the table lookups change when lookups are
directed to a TCP-based server. For a description of the TCP
client/server lookup protocol, see <a href="tcp_table.5.html"><b>tcp_table</b>(5)</a>. This feature is not
@ -180,10 +180,10 @@ CANONICAL(5) CANONICAL(5)
Results are the same as with indexed file lookups.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
The table format does not understand quoting conventions.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant. The text
below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for more
details including examples.
@ -257,17 +257,17 @@ CANONICAL(5) CANONICAL(5)
<a href="postconf.5.html#remote_header_rewrite_domain">remote_header_rewrite_domain</a> parameter, and adding missing head-
ers.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="cleanup.8.html">cleanup(8)</a>, canonicalize and enqueue mail
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="virtual.5.html">virtual(5)</a>, <a href="ADDRESS_REWRITING_README.html#virtual">virtual aliasing</a>
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<a href="ADDRESS_REWRITING_README.html">ADDRESS_REWRITING_README</a>, address rewriting guide
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

22
postfix/html/cidr_table.5.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
CIDR_TABLE(5) CIDR_TABLE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
cidr_table - format of Postfix CIDR tables
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" <a href="cidr_table.5.html">cidr</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="cidr_table.5.html">cidr</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix mail system uses optional lookup tables. These tables are
usually in <b>dbm</b> or <b>db</b> format. Alternatively, lookup tables can be spec-
ified in CIDR (Classless Inter-Domain Routing) form. In this case, each
@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ CIDR_TABLE(5) CIDR_TABLE(5)
To test lookup tables, use the "<b>postmap -q</b>" command as described in the
SYNOPSIS above.
<b>TABLE FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="table_format">TABLE FORMAT</a></b>
The general form of a Postfix CIDR table is:
<i>pattern result</i>
@ -73,11 +73,11 @@ CIDR_TABLE(5) CIDR_TABLE(5)
A logical line starts with non-whitespace text. A line that
starts with whitespace continues a logical line.
<b>TABLE SEARCH ORDER</b>
<b><a name="table_search_order">TABLE SEARCH ORDER</a></b>
Patterns are applied in the order as specified in the table, until a
pattern is found that matches the search string.
<b>ADDRESS PATTERN SYNTAX</b>
<b><a name="address_pattern_syntax">ADDRESS PATTERN SYNTAX</a></b>
Postfix CIDR tables are pattern-based. A pattern is either a <i>net-</i>
<i>work</i><b>_</b><i>address</i> which requires an exact match, or a <i>network</i><b>_</b><i>address/pre-</i>
<i>fix</i><b>_</b><i>length</i> where the <i>prefix</i><b>_</b><i>length</i> part specifies the length of the
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ CIDR_TABLE(5) CIDR_TABLE(5)
Note: address information may be enclosed inside "[]" but this form is
not required.
<b>INLINE SPECIFICATION</b>
<b><a name="inline_specification">INLINE SPECIFICATION</a></b>
The contents of a table may be specified in the table name (Postfix 3.7
and later). The basic syntax is:
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ CIDR_TABLE(5) CIDR_TABLE(5)
Note: if a rule contains <b>$</b>, specify <b>$$</b> to keep Postfix from trying to
do <i>$name</i> expansion as it evaluates a parameter value.
<b>EXAMPLE SMTPD ACCESS MAP</b>
<b><a name="example_smtpd_access_map">EXAMPLE SMTPD ACCESS MAP</a></b>
/etc/postfix/<a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>:
<a href="postconf.5.html#smtpd_client_restrictions">smtpd_client_restrictions</a> = ... <a href="cidr_table.5.html">cidr</a>:/etc/postfix/client.cidr ...
@ -134,15 +134,15 @@ CIDR_TABLE(5) CIDR_TABLE(5)
2001:db8::1 OK
2001:db8::/32 REJECT
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp_table(5)</a>, format of regular expression tables
<a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre_table(5)</a>, format of PCRE tables
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
CIDR table support was introduced with Postfix version 2.1.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

18
postfix/html/defer.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
bounce - Postfix delivery status reports
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>bounce</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="bounce.8.html"><b>bounce</b>(8)</a> daemon maintains per-message log files with delivery sta-
tus information. Each log file is named after the queue file that it
corresponds to, and is kept in a queue subdirectory named after the
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
This is used by clients that cannot retry transactions by themselves,
and that depend on retry logic in their own client.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc822">RFC 822</a> (ARPA Internet Text Messages)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2045">RFC 2045</a> (Format of Internet Message Bodies)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2822">RFC 2822</a> (Internet Message Format)
@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6532">RFC 6532</a> (Internationalized Message Format)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6533">RFC 6533</a> (Internationalized Delivery Status Notifications)
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automatically, as <a href="bounce.8.html"><b>bounce</b>(8)</a> processes
run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>"
to speed up a change.
@ -166,12 +166,12 @@ BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#header_from_format">header_from_format</a> (standard)</b>
The format of the Postfix-generated <b>From:</b> header.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix/bounce/* non-delivery records
/var/spool/postfix/defer/* non-delivery records
/var/spool/postfix/trace/* delivery status records
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="bounce.5.html">bounce(5)</a>, bounce message template format
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

20
postfix/html/discard.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
DISCARD(8) DISCARD(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
discard - Postfix discard mail delivery agent
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>discard</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix <a href="discard.8.html"><b>discard</b>(8)</a> delivery agent processes delivery requests from
the queue manager. Each request specifies a queue file, a sender
address, a next-hop destination that is treated as the reason for dis-
@ -29,20 +29,20 @@ DISCARD(8) DISCARD(8)
Delivery status reports are sent to the <a href="trace.8.html"><b>trace</b>(8)</a> daemon as appropriate.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="discard.8.html"><b>discard</b>(8)</a> mailer is not security-sensitive. It does not talk to
the network, and can be run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3463">RFC 3463</a> (Enhanced Status Codes)
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
Depending on the setting of the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#notify_classes">notify_classes</a></b> parameter, the postmas-
ter is notified of bounces and of other trouble.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automatically as <a href="discard.8.html"><b>discard</b>(8)</a> processes
run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>"
to speed up a change.
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ DISCARD(8) DISCARD(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#service_name">service_name</a> (read-only)</b>
The <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> service name of a Postfix daemon process.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
<a href="bounce.8.html">bounce(8)</a>, delivery status reports
<a href="error.8.html">error(8)</a>, Postfix error delivery agent
@ -109,10 +109,10 @@ DISCARD(8) DISCARD(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
This service was introduced with Postfix version 2.2.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

18
postfix/html/dnsblog.8.html
View File

@ -7,18 +7,18 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
DNSBLOG(8) DNSBLOG(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
dnsblog - Postfix DNS allow/denylist logger
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>dnsblog</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="dnsblog.8.html"><b>dnsblog</b>(8)</a> server implements an ad-hoc DNS allow/denylist lookup
service. This may eventually be replaced by an UDP client that is built
directly into the <a href="postscreen.8.html"><b>postscreen</b>(8)</a> server.
<b>PROTOCOL</b>
<b><a name="protocol">PROTOCOL</a></b>
With each connection, the <a href="dnsblog.8.html"><b>dnsblog</b>(8)</a> server receives a DNS
allow/denylist domain name, an IP address, and an ID. If the IP
address is listed under the DNS allow/denylist, the <a href="dnsblog.8.html"><b>dnsblog</b>(8)</a> server
@ -29,10 +29,10 @@ DNSBLOG(8) DNSBLOG(8)
reply, or a negative reply that contains no SOA record. Finally, the
<a href="dnsblog.8.html"><b>dnsblog</b>(8)</a> server closes the connection.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automatically, as <a href="dnsblog.8.html"><b>dnsblog</b>(8)</a> processes
run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>"
to speed up a change.
@ -77,16 +77,16 @@ DNSBLOG(8) DNSBLOG(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#service_name">service_name</a> (read-only)</b>
The <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> service name of a Postfix daemon process.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="smtpd.8.html">smtpd(8)</a>, Postfix SMTP server
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
This service was introduced with Postfix version 2.8.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

18
postfix/html/error.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
ERROR(8) ERROR(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
error - Postfix error/retry mail delivery agent
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>error</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix <a href="error.8.html"><b>error</b>(8)</a> delivery agent processes delivery requests from
the queue manager. Each request specifies a queue file, a sender
address, the reason for non-delivery (specified as the next-hop desti-
@ -30,20 +30,20 @@ ERROR(8) ERROR(8)
Delivery status reports are sent to the <a href="bounce.8.html"><b>bounce</b>(8)</a>, <a href="defer.8.html"><b>defer</b>(8)</a> or <a href="trace.8.html"><b>trace</b>(8)</a>
daemon as appropriate.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="error.8.html"><b>error</b>(8)</a> mailer is not security-sensitive. It does not talk to the
network, and can be run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3463">RFC 3463</a> (Enhanced Status Codes)
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
Depending on the setting of the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#notify_classes">notify_classes</a></b> parameter, the postmas-
ter is notified of bounces and of other trouble.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automatically as <a href="error.8.html"><b>error</b>(8)</a> processes
run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>"
to speed up a change.
@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ ERROR(8) ERROR(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#service_name">service_name</a> (read-only)</b>
The <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> service name of a Postfix daemon process.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
<a href="bounce.8.html">bounce(8)</a>, delivery status reports
<a href="discard.8.html">discard(8)</a>, Postfix discard delivery agent
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ ERROR(8) ERROR(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

24
postfix/html/flush.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
FLUSH(8) FLUSH(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
flush - Postfix fast flush server
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>flush</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="flush.8.html"><b>flush</b>(8)</a> server maintains a record of deferred mail by destination.
This information is used to improve the performance of the SMTP <b>ETRN</b>
request, and of its command-line equivalent, "<b>sendmail -qR</b>" or
@ -56,15 +56,15 @@ FLUSH(8) FLUSH(8)
<b>purge</b> Do a <b>refresh</b> for all per-destination logfiles.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="flush.8.html"><b>flush</b>(8)</a> server is not security-sensitive. It does not talk to the
network, and it does not talk to local users. The fast flush server
can run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
Fast flush logfiles are truncated only after a "send" request, not when
mail is actually delivered, and therefore can accumulate outdated or
redundant data. In order to maintain sanity, "refresh" must be executed
@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ FLUSH(8) FLUSH(8)
destination because such mail typically only has recipients in one
domain.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automatically as <a href="flush.8.html"><b>flush</b>(8)</a> processes
run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>"
to speed up a change.
@ -144,10 +144,10 @@ FLUSH(8) FLUSH(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#service_name">service_name</a> (read-only)</b>
The <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> service name of a Postfix daemon process.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix/flush, "fast flush" logfiles.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="smtpd.8.html">smtpd(8)</a>, SMTP server
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
@ -156,13 +156,13 @@ FLUSH(8) FLUSH(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="ETRN_README.html">ETRN_README</a>, Postfix ETRN howto
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
This service was introduced with Postfix version 1.0.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

34
postfix/html/generic.5.html
View File

@ -7,17 +7,17 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
GENERIC(5) GENERIC(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
generic - Postfix generic table format
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap /etc/postfix/generic</b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" /etc/postfix/generic</b>
<b>postmap -q - /etc/postfix/generic</b> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The optional <a href="generic.5.html"><b>generic</b>(5)</a> table specifies an address mapping that applies
when mail is delivered. This is the opposite of <a href="canonical.5.html"><b>canonical</b>(5)</a> mapping,
which applies when mail is received.
@ -48,13 +48,13 @@ GENERIC(5) GENERIC(5)
a slightly different way as described below under "REGULAR EXPRESSION
TABLES" or "TCP-BASED TABLES".
<b>CASE FOLDING</b>
<b><a name="case_folding">CASE FOLDING</a></b>
The search string is folded to lowercase before database lookup. As of
Postfix 2.3, the search string is not case folded with database types
such as <a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp</a>: or <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>: whose lookup fields can match both upper and
lower case.
<b>TABLE FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="table_format">TABLE FORMAT</a></b>
The input format for the <a href="postmap.1.html"><b>postmap</b>(1)</a> command is as follows:
<i>pattern result</i>
@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ GENERIC(5) GENERIC(5)
A logical line starts with non-whitespace text. A line that
starts with whitespace continues a logical line.
<b>TABLE SEARCH ORDER</b>
<b><a name="table_search_order">TABLE SEARCH ORDER</a></b>
With lookups from indexed files such as DB or DBM, or from networked
tables such as NIS, LDAP or SQL, each <i>user</i>@<i>domain</i> query produces a
sequence of query patterns as described below.
@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ GENERIC(5) GENERIC(5)
Replace other addresses in <i>domain</i> by <i>address</i>. This form has the
lowest precedence.
<b>RESULT ADDRESS REWRITING</b>
<b><a name="result_address_rewriting">RESULT ADDRESS REWRITING</a></b>
The lookup result is subject to address rewriting:
<b>o</b> When the result has the form @<i>otherdomain</i>, the result becomes
@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ GENERIC(5) GENERIC(5)
<b>o</b> When "<b><a href="postconf.5.html#append_dot_mydomain">append_dot_mydomain</a>=yes</b>", append "<b>.$<a href="postconf.5.html#mydomain">mydomain</a></b>" to addresses
without ".domain".
<b>ADDRESS EXTENSION</b>
<b><a name="address_extension">ADDRESS EXTENSION</a></b>
When a mail address localpart contains the optional recipient delimiter
(e.g., <i>user+foo</i>@<i>domain</i>), the lookup order becomes: <i>user+foo</i>@<i>domain</i>,
<i>user</i>@<i>domain</i>, <i>user+foo</i>, <i>user</i>, and @<i>domain</i>.
@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ GENERIC(5) GENERIC(5)
unmatched address extension (<i>+foo</i>) is propagated to the result of table
lookup.
<b>REGULAR EXPRESSION TABLES</b>
<b><a name="regular_expression_tables">REGULAR EXPRESSION TABLES</a></b>
This section describes how the table lookups change when the table is
given in the form of regular expressions. For a description of regular
expression lookup table syntax, see <a href="regexp_table.5.html"><b>regexp_table</b>(5)</a> or <a href="pcre_table.5.html"><b>pcre_table</b>(5)</a>.
@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ GENERIC(5) GENERIC(5)
feature that parenthesized substrings from the pattern can be interpo-
lated as <b>$1</b>, <b>$2</b> and so on.
<b>TCP-BASED TABLES</b>
<b><a name="tcp-based_tables">TCP-BASED TABLES</a></b>
This section describes how the table lookups change when lookups are
directed to a TCP-based server. For a description of the TCP
client/server lookup protocol, see <a href="tcp_table.5.html"><b>tcp_table</b>(5)</a>. This feature is
@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ GENERIC(5) GENERIC(5)
Results are the same as with indexed file lookups.
<b>EXAMPLE</b>
<b><a name="example">EXAMPLE</a></b>
The following shows a generic mapping with an indexed file. When mail
is sent to a remote host via SMTP, this replaces <i>his@localdomain.local</i>
by his ISP mail address, replaces <i>her@localdomain.local</i> by her ISP mail
@ -161,10 +161,10 @@ GENERIC(5) GENERIC(5)
find out what tables your system supports use the command "<b>postconf</b>
<b>-m</b>".
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
The table format does not understand quoting conventions.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant. The text
below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for more
details including examples.
@ -204,20 +204,20 @@ GENERIC(5) GENERIC(5)
<i>name</i>-request address localparts when the <a href="postconf.5.html#recipient_delimiter">recipient_delimiter</a> is
set to "-".
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="smtp.8.html">smtp(8)</a>, Postfix SMTP client
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="ADDRESS_REWRITING_README.html">ADDRESS_REWRITING_README</a>, address rewriting guide
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<a href="STANDARD_CONFIGURATION_README.html">STANDARD_CONFIGURATION_README</a>, configuration examples
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
A genericstable feature appears in the Sendmail MTA.
This feature is available in Postfix 2.2 and later.

34
postfix/html/header_checks.5.html
View File

@ -7,10 +7,10 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
HEADER_CHECKS(5) HEADER_CHECKS(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
<a href="postconf.5.html#header_checks">header_checks</a> - Postfix built-in content inspection
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#header_checks">header_checks</a> = <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>:/etc/postfix/header_checks</b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#mime_header_checks">mime_header_checks</a> = <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>:/etc/postfix/mime_header_checks</b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#nested_header_checks">nested_header_checks</a> = <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>:/etc/postfix/nested_header_checks</b>
@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ HEADER_CHECKS(5) HEADER_CHECKS(5)
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
This document describes access control on the content of message head-
ers and message body lines; it is implemented by the Postfix <a href="cleanup.8.html"><b>cleanup</b>(8)</a>
server before mail is queued. See <a href="access.5.html"><b>access</b>(5)</a> for access control on
@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ HEADER_CHECKS(5) HEADER_CHECKS(5)
archives. See the documents referenced below in the README FILES sec-
tion if you need more sophisticated content analysis.
<b>FILTERS WHILE RECEIVING MAIL</b>
<b><a name="filters_while_receiving_mail">FILTERS WHILE RECEIVING MAIL</a></b>
Postfix implements the following four built-in content inspection
classes while receiving mail:
@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ HEADER_CHECKS(5) HEADER_CHECKS(5)
With Postfix versions before 2.0, all content after the initial
message headers is treated as body content.
<b>FILTERS AFTER RECEIVING MAIL</b>
<b><a name="filters_after_receiving_mail">FILTERS AFTER RECEIVING MAIL</a></b>
Postfix supports a subset of the built-in content inspection classes
after the message is received:
@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ HEADER_CHECKS(5) HEADER_CHECKS(5)
This feature is available in Postfix 2.7 and later.
<b>FILTERS WHILE DELIVERING MAIL</b>
<b><a name="filters_while_delivering_mail">FILTERS WHILE DELIVERING MAIL</a></b>
Postfix supports all four content inspection classes while delivering
mail via SMTP.
@ -98,12 +98,12 @@ HEADER_CHECKS(5) HEADER_CHECKS(5)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#smtp_body_checks">smtp_body_checks</a></b> (default: empty)
These features are available in Postfix 2.5 and later.
<b>COMPATIBILITY</b>
<b><a name="compatibility">COMPATIBILITY</a></b>
With Postfix version 2.2 and earlier specify "<b>postmap -fq</b>" to query a
table that contains case sensitive patterns. By default, <a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp</a>: and
<a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>: patterns are case insensitive.
<b>TABLE FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="table_format">TABLE FORMAT</a></b>
This document assumes that header and <a href="postconf.5.html#body_checks">body_checks</a> rules are specified
in the form of Postfix regular expression lookup tables. Usually the
best performance is obtained with <b>pcre</b> (Perl Compatible Regular Expres-
@ -145,13 +145,13 @@ HEADER_CHECKS(5) HEADER_CHECKS(5)
A pattern/action line starts with non-whitespace text. A line
that starts with whitespace continues a logical line.
<b>TABLE SEARCH ORDER</b>
<b><a name="table_search_order">TABLE SEARCH ORDER</a></b>
For each line of message input, the patterns are applied in the order
as specified in the table. When a pattern is found that matches the
input line, the corresponding action is executed and then the next
input line is inspected.
<b>TEXT SUBSTITUTION</b>
<b><a name="text_substitution">TEXT SUBSTITUTION</a></b>
Substitution of substrings from the matched expression into the <i>action</i>
string is possible using the conventional Perl syntax (<b>$1</b>, <b>$2</b>, etc.).
The macros in the result string may need to be written as <b>${n}</b> or <b>$(n)</b>
@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ HEADER_CHECKS(5) HEADER_CHECKS(5)
the expression does not match, substitutions are not available for
negated patterns.
<b>ACTIONS</b>
<b><a name="actions">ACTIONS</a></b>
Action names are case insensitive. They are shown in upper case for
consistency with other Postfix documentation.
@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ HEADER_CHECKS(5) HEADER_CHECKS(5)
useful for debugging and for testing a pattern before applying
more drastic actions.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
Empty lines never match, because some map types mis-behave when given a
zero-length search string. This limitation may be removed for regular
expression tables in a future release.
@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ HEADER_CHECKS(5) HEADER_CHECKS(5)
before they are deleted. Examples are: <b>Bcc:</b>, <b>Content-Length:</b>,
<b>Return-Path:</b>.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#body_checks">body_checks</a> (empty)</b>
Optional lookup tables for content inspection as specified in
the <a href="header_checks.5.html"><b>body_checks</b>(5)</a> manual page.
@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ HEADER_CHECKS(5) HEADER_CHECKS(5)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#disable_mime_input_processing">disable_mime_input_processing</a> (no)</b>
Turn off MIME processing while receiving mail.
<b>EXAMPLES</b>
<b><a name="examples">EXAMPLES</a></b>
Header pattern to block attachments with bad file name extensions. For
convenience, the PCRE /x flag is specified, so that there is no need to
collapse the pattern into a single line of text. The purpose of the
@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ HEADER_CHECKS(5) HEADER_CHECKS(5)
/^&lt;iframe src=(3D)?cid:.* height=(3D)?0 width=(3D)?0&gt;$/
REJECT IFRAME vulnerability exploit
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="cleanup.8.html">cleanup(8)</a>, canonicalize and enqueue Postfix message
<a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre_table(5)</a>, format of PCRE lookup tables
<a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp_table(5)</a>, format of POSIX regular expression tables
@ -461,13 +461,13 @@ HEADER_CHECKS(5) HEADER_CHECKS(5)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2045">RFC 2045</a>, base64 and quoted-printable encoding rules
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2047">RFC 2047</a>, message header encoding for non-ASCII text
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<a href="CONTENT_INSPECTION_README.html">CONTENT_INSPECTION_README</a>, Postfix content inspection overview
<a href="BUILTIN_FILTER_README.html">BUILTIN_FILTER_README</a>, Postfix built-in content inspection
<a href="BACKSCATTER_README.html">BACKSCATTER_README</a>, blocking returned forged mail
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

24
postfix/html/ldap_table.5.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
LDAP_TABLE(5) LDAP_TABLE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
ldap_table - Postfix LDAP client configuration
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" <a href="ldap_table.5.html">ldap</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="ldap_table.5.html">ldap</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix mail system uses optional tables for address rewriting or
mail routing. These tables are usually in <b>dbm</b> or <b>db</b> format.
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ LDAP_TABLE(5) LDAP_TABLE(5)
For details about LDAP SSL and STARTTLS, see the section on SSL and
STARTTLS below.
<b>LIST MEMBERSHIP</b>
<b><a name="list_membership">LIST MEMBERSHIP</a></b>
When using LDAP to store lists such as $<a href="postconf.5.html#mynetworks">mynetworks</a>, $<a href="postconf.5.html#mydestination">mydestination</a>,
$<a href="postconf.5.html#relay_domains">relay_domains</a>, $<a href="postconf.5.html#local_recipient_maps">local_recipient_maps</a>, etc., it is important to under-
stand that the table must store each list member as a separate key. The
@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ LDAP_TABLE(5) LDAP_TABLE(5)
query_filter = domain=%s
result_attribute = domain
<b>GENERAL LDAP PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="general_ldap_parameters">GENERAL LDAP PARAMETERS</a></b>
In the text below, default values are given in parentheses. Note:
don't use quotes in these variables; at least, not until the Postfix
configuration routines understand how to deal with quoted strings.
@ -484,7 +484,7 @@ LDAP_TABLE(5) LDAP_TABLE(5)
<b>debuglevel (default: 0)</b>
What level to set for debugging in the OpenLDAP libraries.
<b>LDAP SASL PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="ldap_sasl_parameters">LDAP SASL PARAMETERS</a></b>
If you're using the OpenLDAP libraries compiled with SASL support,
Postfix 2.8 and later built with LDAP SASL support as described in
<a href="LDAP_README.html">LDAP_README</a> can authenticate to LDAP servers via SASL.
@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ LDAP_TABLE(5) LDAP_TABLE(5)
The minimum required sasl security factor required to establish
a connection.
<b>LDAP SSL AND STARTTLS PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="ldap_ssl_and_starttls_parameters">LDAP SSL AND STARTTLS PARAMETERS</a></b>
If you're using the OpenLDAP libraries compiled with SSL support, Post-
fix can connect to LDAP SSL servers and can issue the STARTTLS command.
@ -621,7 +621,7 @@ LDAP_TABLE(5) LDAP_TABLE(5)
<b>tls_cipher_suite (No default)</b>
Cipher suite to use in SSL/TLS negotiations.
<b>EXAMPLE</b>
<b><a name="example">EXAMPLE</a></b>
Here's a basic example for using LDAP to look up <a href="local.8.html">local(8)</a> aliases.
Assume that in <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>, you have:
@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ LDAP_TABLE(5) LDAP_TABLE(5)
<a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>, which is normally world-readable. Support for this form will
be removed in a future Postfix version.
<b>OTHER OBSOLETE FEATURES</b>
<b><a name="other_obsolete_features">OTHER OBSOLETE FEATURES</a></b>
<b>result_filter (No default)</b>
For backwards compatibility with the pre 2.2 LDAP clients,
<b>result_filter</b> can for now be used instead of <b>result_format</b>, when
@ -662,17 +662,17 @@ LDAP_TABLE(5) LDAP_TABLE(5)
reflects the function of the parameter. This compatibility
interface may be removed in a future release.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="mysql_table.5.html">mysql_table(5)</a>, MySQL lookup tables
<a href="pgsql_table.5.html">pgsql_table(5)</a>, PostgreSQL lookup tables
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<a href="LDAP_README.html">LDAP_README</a>, Postfix LDAP client guide
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

22
postfix/html/lmdb_table.5.html
View File

@ -7,10 +7,10 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
LMDB_TABLE(5) LMDB_TABLE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
lmdb_table - Postfix LMDB adapter
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap <a href="lmdb_table.5.html">lmdb</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i>
<b>postmap -i <a href="lmdb_table.5.html">lmdb</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
@ -20,13 +20,13 @@ LMDB_TABLE(5) LMDB_TABLE(5)
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>key</i><b>" <a href="lmdb_table.5.html">lmdb</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="lmdb_table.5.html">lmdb</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix LMDB adapter provides access to a persistent, mem-
ory-mapped, key-value store. The database size is limited only by the
size of the memory address space (typically 31 or 47 bits on 32-bit or
64-bit CPUs, respectively) and by the available file system space.
<b>REQUESTS</b>
<b><a name="requests">REQUESTS</a></b>
The LMDB adapter supports all Postfix lookup table operations. This
makes LMDB suitable for Postfix address rewriting, routing, access
policies, caches, or any information that can be stored under a fixed
@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ LMDB_TABLE(5) LMDB_TABLE(5)
Changes to an LMDB database do not trigger an automatic daemon restart,
and do not require a daemon restart with "<b>postfix reload</b>".
<b>RELIABILITY</b>
<b><a name="reliability">RELIABILITY</a></b>
LMDB's copy-on-write architecture provides safe updates, at the cost of
using more space than some other flat-file databases. Read operations
are memory-mapped for speed. Write operations are not memory-mapped to
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ LMDB_TABLE(5) LMDB_TABLE(5)
ing requests through the <a href="proxymap.8.html">proxymap(8)</a> service. This makes LMDB suitable
as a shared cache for <a href="verify.8.html">verify(8)</a> or <a href="postscreen.8.html">postscreen(8)</a> services.
<b>SYNCHRONIZATION</b>
<b><a name="synchronization">SYNCHRONIZATION</a></b>
The Postfix LMDB adapter does not use LMDB's built-in locking scheme,
because that would require world-writable lockfiles and would violate
the Postfix security model. Instead, Postfix uses fcntl(2) locks with
@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ LMDB_TABLE(5) LMDB_TABLE(5)
neous database requests, then it must protect its transactions with
in-process locks, in addition to the per-process fcntl(2) locks.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Short-lived programs automatically pick up changes to <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>. With
long-running daemon programs, Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>" after a
configuration change.
@ -79,19 +79,19 @@ LMDB_TABLE(5) LMDB_TABLE(5)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#lmdb_map_size">lmdb_map_size</a> (16777216)</b>
The initial OpenLDAP LMDB database size limit in bytes.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postconf.1.html">postconf(1)</a>, Postfix supported lookup tables
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table maintenance
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<a href="LMDB_README.html">LMDB_README</a>, Postfix OpenLDAP LMDB howto
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
LMDB support was introduced with Postfix version 2.11.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

50
postfix/html/lmtp.8.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
smtp, lmtp - Postfix SMTP+LMTP client
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>smtp</b> [generic Postfix daemon options] [flags=DORX]
<b>lmtp</b> [generic Postfix daemon options] [flags=DORX]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix SMTP+LMTP client implements the SMTP and LMTP mail delivery
protocols. It processes message delivery requests from the queue man-
ager. Each request specifies a queue file, a sender address, a domain
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
that have a high volume of mail in the <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#active_queue">active queue</a>. Connection caching
can be enabled permanently for specific destinations.
<b>SMTP SERVER LOOKUP</b>
<b><a name="smtp_server_lookup">SMTP SERVER LOOKUP</a></b>
The Postfix SMTP client supports multiple destinations separated by
comma or whitespace (Postfix 3.5 and later). Each destination is tried
in the specified order.
@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
specified service (default: <b>smtp</b>). An IPv6 address must be for-
matted as [<b>ipv6</b>:<i>address</i>].
<b>LMTP SERVER LOOKUP</b>
<b><a name="lmtp_server_lookup">LMTP SERVER LOOKUP</a></b>
The Postfix LMTP client supports multiple destinations separated by
comma or whitespace (Postfix 3.5 and later). Each destination is tried
in the specified order.
@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
(default: <b>lmtp</b>). An IPv6 address must be formatted as
[<b>ipv6</b>:<i>address</i>].
<b>SINGLE-RECIPIENT DELIVERY</b>
<b><a name="single-recipient_delivery">SINGLE-RECIPIENT DELIVERY</a></b>
By default, the Postfix SMTP+LMTP client delivers mail to multiple
recipients per delivery request. This is undesirable when prepending a
<b>Delivered-to:</b> or <b>X-Original-To:</b> message header. To prevent Postfix from
@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
in the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> file, where <i>transport</i> is the name in the first
column of the Postfix <a href="master.5.html"><b>master.cf</b></a> entry for this mail delivery service.
<b>COMMAND ATTRIBUTE SYNTAX</b>
<b><a name="command_attribute_syntax">COMMAND ATTRIBUTE SYNTAX</a></b>
<b>flags=DORX</b> (optional)
Optional message processing flags.
@ -147,12 +147,12 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
This feature is available as of Postfix 3.5.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The SMTP+LMTP client is moderately security-sensitive. It talks to SMTP
or LMTP servers and to DNS servers on the network. The SMTP+LMTP client
can be run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc821">RFC 821</a> (SMTP protocol)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc822">RFC 822</a> (ARPA Internet Text Messages)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1651">RFC 1651</a> (SMTP service extensions)
@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6533">RFC 6533</a> (Internationalized Delivery Status Notifications)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7672">RFC 7672</a> (SMTP security via opportunistic DANE TLS)
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
Corrupted message files are marked so that the queue manager can move
them to the <b>corrupt</b> queue for further inspection.
@ -183,14 +183,14 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
Depending on the setting of the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#notify_classes">notify_classes</a></b> parameter, the postmas-
ter is notified of bounces, protocol problems, and of other trouble.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
SMTP and LMTP connection reuse for TLS (without closing the SMTP or
LMTP connection) is not supported before Postfix 3.4.
SMTP and LMTP connection reuse assumes that SASL credentials are valid
for all destinations that map onto the same IP address and TCP port.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Postfix versions 2.3 and later implement the SMTP and LMTP client with
the same program, and choose the protocol and configuration parameters
based on the process name, <b>smtp</b> or <b>lmtp</b>.
@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for
more details including examples.
<b>COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="compatibility_controls">COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#ignore_mx_lookup_error">ignore_mx_lookup_error</a> (no)</b>
Ignore DNS MX lookups that produce no response.
@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
to MX or IP address lookup as if SRV record lookup was not
enabled.
<b>MIME PROCESSING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="mime_processing_controls">MIME PROCESSING CONTROLS</a></b>
Available in Postfix version 2.0 and later:
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#disable_mime_output_conversion">disable_mime_output_conversion</a> (no)</b>
@ -434,14 +434,14 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#mime_nesting_limit">mime_nesting_limit</a> (100)</b>
The maximal recursion level that the MIME processor will handle.
<b>EXTERNAL CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="external_content_inspection_controls">EXTERNAL CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS</a></b>
Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#smtp_send_xforward_command">smtp_send_xforward_command</a> (no)</b>
Send the non-standard XFORWARD command when the Postfix SMTP
server EHLO response announces XFORWARD support.
<b>SASL AUTHENTICATION CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="sasl_authentication_controls">SASL AUTHENTICATION CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#smtp_sasl_auth_enable">smtp_sasl_auth_enable</a> (no)</b>
Enable SASL authentication in the Postfix SMTP client.
@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
The delimiter between username and password in sasl_passwd_maps
lookup results.
<b>STARTTLS SUPPORT CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="starttls_support_controls">STARTTLS SUPPORT CONTROLS</a></b>
Detailed information about STARTTLS configuration may be found in the
<a href="TLS_README.html">TLS_README</a> document.
@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
reuse a previously-negotiated TLS session (there is no new
information to report).
<b>OBSOLETE STARTTLS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="obsolete_starttls_controls">OBSOLETE STARTTLS CONTROLS</a></b>
The following configuration parameters exist for compatibility with
Postfix versions before 2.3. Support for these will be removed in a
future release.
@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
Obsolete Postfix &lt; 2.3 control for the Postfix SMTP client TLS
cipher list.
<b>RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="resource_and_rate_controls">RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#smtp_connect_timeout">smtp_connect_timeout</a> (30s)</b>
The Postfix SMTP client time limit for completing a TCP connec-
tion, or zero (use the operating system built-in time limit).
@ -921,7 +921,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
<a href="postconf.5.html#default_destination_recipient_limit">ient_limit</a> parameter value, where <i>transport</i> is the <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a>
name of the message delivery transport.
<b>SMTPUTF8 CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="smtputf8_controls">SMTPUTF8 CONTROLS</a></b>
Preliminary SMTPUTF8 support is introduced with Postfix 3.0.
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#smtputf8_enable">smtputf8_enable</a> (yes)</b>
@ -939,7 +939,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
IDNA2008, when converting UTF-8 domain names to/from the ASCII
form that is used for DNS lookups.
<b>TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="trouble_shooting_controls">TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#debug_peer_level">debug_peer_level</a> (2)</b>
The increment in verbose logging level when a nexthop destina-
tion, remote client or server name or network address matches a
@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#notify_classes">notify_classes</a> (resource, software)</b>
The list of error classes that are reported to the postmaster.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#best_mx_transport">best_mx_transport</a> (empty)</b>
Where the Postfix SMTP client should deliver mail when it
detects a "mail loops back to myself" error condition.
@ -1097,7 +1097,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
Defer delivery when the Postfix SMTP client cannot apply the
<a href="postconf.5.html#smtp_bind_address">smtp_bind_address</a> or <a href="postconf.5.html#smtp_bind_address6">smtp_bind_address6</a> setting.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="generic.5.html">generic(5)</a>, output address rewriting
<a href="header_checks.5.html">header_checks(5)</a>, message header content inspection
<a href="header_checks.5.html">body_checks(5)</a>, body parts content inspection
@ -1111,11 +1111,11 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="SASL_README.html">SASL_README</a>, Postfix SASL howto
<a href="TLS_README.html">TLS_README</a>, Postfix STARTTLS howto
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

36
postfix/html/mailq.1.html
View File

@ -7,10 +7,10 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
sendmail - Postfix to Sendmail compatibility interface
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>sendmail</b> [<i>option ...</i>] [<i>recipient ...</i>]
<b>mailq</b>
@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<b>newaliases</b>
<b>sendmail -I</b>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix <a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>sendmail</b>(1)</a> command implements the Postfix to Sendmail com-
patibility interface. For the sake of compatibility with existing
applications, some Sendmail command-line options are recognized but
@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
Log mailer traffic. Use the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#debug_peer_list">debug_peer_list</a></b> and <b><a href="postconf.5.html#debug_peer_level">debug_peer_level</a></b>
configuration parameters instead.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
By design, this program is not set-user (or group) id. It is prepared
to handle message content from untrusted, possibly remote, users.
@ -318,11 +318,11 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>mail</b>(1)</a> command options, by specifying an email address that
starts with "<b>-</b>".
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>, and to the standard
error stream.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
<b>MAIL_CONFIG</b>
Directory with Postfix configuration files.
@ -336,19 +336,19 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<b>NAME</b> The sender full name. This is used only with messages that have
no <b>From:</b> message header. See also the <b>-F</b> option above.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this pro-
gram. The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>post-</b></a>
<a href="postconf.5.html"><b>conf</b>(5)</a> for more details including examples.
<b>COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="compatibility_controls">COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</a></b>
Available with Postfix 2.9 and later:
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#sendmail_fix_line_endings">sendmail_fix_line_endings</a> (always)</b>
Controls how the Postfix sendmail command converts email message
line endings from &lt;CR&gt;&lt;LF&gt; into UNIX format (&lt;LF&gt;).
<b>TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="trouble_shooting_controls">TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</a></b>
The <a href="DEBUG_README.html">DEBUG_README</a> file gives examples of how to troubleshoot a Postfix
system.
@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
verbose logging level to increase by the amount specified in
$<a href="postconf.5.html#debug_peer_level">debug_peer_level</a>.
<b>ACCESS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="access_controls">ACCESS CONTROLS</a></b>
Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later:
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#authorized_flush_users">authorized_flush_users</a> (<a href="DATABASE_README.html#types">static</a>:anyone)</b>
@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>mail</b>(1)</a> command (and with the privileged <a href="postdrop.1.html"><b>postdrop</b>(1)</a> helper com-
mand).
<b>RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="resource_and_rate_controls">RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#bounce_size_limit">bounce_size_limit</a> (50000)</b>
The maximal amount of original message text that is sent in a
non-delivery notification.
@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
The time between <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#deferred_queue">deferred queue</a> scans by the queue manager;
prior to Postfix 2.4 the default value was 1000s.
<b>FAST FLUSH CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="fast_flush_controls">FAST FLUSH CONTROLS</a></b>
The <a href="ETRN_README.html">ETRN_README</a> file describes configuration and operation details for
the Postfix "fast flush" service.
@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
Optional list of destinations that are eligible for per-destina-
tion logfiles with mail that is queued to those destinations.
<b>VERP CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="verp_controls">VERP CONTROLS</a></b>
The <a href="VERP_README.html">VERP_README</a> file describes configuration and operation details of
Postfix support for variable envelope return path addresses.
@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
The characters Postfix accepts as VERP delimiter characters on
the Postfix <a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>sendmail</b>(1)</a> command line and in SMTP commands.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#alias_database">alias_database</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The alias databases for <a href="local.8.html"><b>local</b>(8)</a> delivery that are updated with
"<b>newaliases</b>" or with "<b>sendmail -bi</b>".
@ -483,11 +483,11 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
the default Postfix instance, and that are started, stopped,
etc., together with the default Postfix instance.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix, mail queue
/etc/postfix, configuration files
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="pickup.8.html">pickup(8)</a>, mail pickup daemon
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
<a href="smtpd.8.html">smtpd(8)</a>, SMTP server
@ -500,14 +500,14 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README_FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README_FILES</a></b>
Use "<b>postconf <a href="postconf.5.html#readme_directory">readme_directory</a></b>" or "<b>postconf <a href="postconf.5.html#html_directory">html_directory</a></b>" to locate
this information.
<a href="DEBUG_README.html">DEBUG_README</a>, Postfix debugging howto
<a href="ETRN_README.html">ETRN_README</a>, Postfix ETRN howto
<a href="VERP_README.html">VERP_README</a>, Postfix VERP howto
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

8
postfix/html/makedefs.1.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
MAKEDEFS(1) MAKEDEFS(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
makedefs - Postfix makefile configuration utility
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>make makefiles</b> <i>name=value...</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <b>makedefs</b> command identifies the compilation environment, and emits
macro definitions on the standard output stream that can be prepended
to template Makefiles. These macros implement an internal interface
@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ MAKEDEFS(1) MAKEDEFS(1)
Specifies non-default gcc compiler warning options for use when
"make" is invoked in a source subdirectory only.
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

12
postfix/html/master.5.html
View File

@ -7,10 +7,10 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
MASTER(5) MASTER(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
master - Postfix master process configuration file format
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix mail system is implemented by small number of (mostly)
client commands that are invoked by users, and by a larger number of
services that run in the background.
@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ MASTER(5) MASTER(5)
After changing <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> you must execute "<b>postfix reload</b>" to reload
the configuration.
<b>SYNTAX</b>
<b><a name="syntax">SYNTAX</a></b>
The general format of the <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> file is as follows:
<b>o</b> Empty lines and whitespace-only lines are ignored, as are lines
@ -249,15 +249,15 @@ MASTER(5) MASTER(5)
together with any leading or trailing whitespace in the
remaining text.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="master.8.html">master(8)</a>, process manager
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="BASIC_CONFIGURATION_README.html">BASIC_CONFIGURATION_README</a>, basic configuration
<a href="DEBUG_README.html">DEBUG_README</a>, Postfix debugging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

22
postfix/html/master.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
MASTER(8) MASTER(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
master - Postfix master process
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>master</b> [<b>-Dditvw</b>] [<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>] [<b>-e</b> <i>exit</i><b>_</b><i>time</i>]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="master.8.html"><b>master</b>(8)</a> daemon is the resident process that runs Postfix daemons
on demand: daemons to send or receive messages via the network, daemons
to deliver mail locally, etc. These daemons are created on demand up
@ -92,12 +92,12 @@ MASTER(8) MASTER(8)
one would terminate only the master ("<b>postfix stop</b>") and allow
running processes to finish what they are doing.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems are reported to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>. The exit status is
non-zero in case of problems, including problems while initializing as
a master daemon process in the background.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
<b>MAIL_DEBUG</b>
After initialization, start a debugger as specified with the
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#debugger_command">debugger_command</a></b> configuration parameter in the <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> configu-
@ -106,13 +106,13 @@ MASTER(8) MASTER(8)
<b>MAIL_CONFIG</b>
Directory with Postfix configuration files.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Unlike most Postfix daemon processes, the <a href="master.8.html"><b>master</b>(8)</a> server does not
automatically pick up changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a>. Changes to <a href="master.5.html"><b>master.cf</b></a> are
never picked up automatically. Use the "<b>postfix reload</b>" command after
a configuration change.
<b>RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="resource_and_rate_controls">RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#default_process_limit">default_process_limit</a> (100)</b>
The default maximal number of Postfix child processes that pro-
vide a given service.
@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ MASTER(8) MASTER(8)
Selectively disable <a href="master.8.html"><b>master</b>(8)</a> listener ports by service type or
by service name and type.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ MASTER(8) MASTER(8)
Optional setting that avoids lookups in the <b>services</b>(5) data-
base.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
To expand the directory names below into their actual values, use the
command "<b>postconf <a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a></b>" etc.
@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ MASTER(8) MASTER(8)
$<a href="postconf.5.html#queue_directory">queue_directory</a>/pid/master.pid, master lock file.
$<a href="postconf.5.html#data_directory">data_directory</a>/master.lock, master lock file.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
<a href="verify.8.html">verify(8)</a>, address verification
<a href="master.5.html">master(5)</a>, <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> configuration file syntax
@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ MASTER(8) MASTER(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

22
postfix/html/memcache_table.5.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
MEMCACHE_TABLE(5) MEMCACHE_TABLE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
memcache_table - Postfix memcache client configuration
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" <a href="memcache_table.5.html">memcache</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="memcache_table.5.html">memcache</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix mail system uses optional tables for address rewriting or
mail routing. These tables are usually in <b>dbm</b> or <b>db</b> format.
@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ MEMCACHE_TABLE(5) MEMCACHE_TABLE(5)
sequence (first/next) operations. The sequence operation requires a
backup database that supports the operation.
<b>MEMCACHE MAIN PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="memcache_main_parameters">MEMCACHE MAIN PARAMETERS</a></b>
<b>memcache (default: inet:localhost:11211)</b>
The memcache server (note: singular) that Postfix will try to
connect to. For a TCP server specify "inet:" followed by a
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ MEMCACHE_TABLE(5) MEMCACHE_TABLE(5)
greater than 30 days (2592000 seconds) specifies absolute UNIX
time. Smaller values are relative to the time of the update.
<b>MEMCACHE KEY PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="memcache_key_parameters">MEMCACHE KEY PARAMETERS</a></b>
<b>key_format (default: %s)</b>
Format of the lookup and update keys that the Postfix memcache
client sends to the memcache server. By default, these are the
@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ MEMCACHE_TABLE(5) MEMCACHE_TABLE(5)
domain = example.com, <a href="DATABASE_README.html#types">hash</a>:/etc/postfix/searchdomains
<b>MEMCACHE ERROR CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="memcache_error_controls">MEMCACHE ERROR CONTROLS</a></b>
<b>data_size_limit (default: 10240)</b>
The maximal memcache reply data length in bytes.
@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ MEMCACHE_TABLE(5) MEMCACHE_TABLE(5)
The time limit for sending a memcache command and for receiving
a memcache reply.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
The Postfix memcache client cannot be used for security-sensitive
tables such as <b><a href="postconf.5.html#alias_maps">alias_maps</a></b> (these may contain "<i>|command</i> and "<i>/file/name</i>"
destinations), or <b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_uid_maps">virtual_uid_maps</a></b>, <b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_gid_maps">virtual_gid_maps</a></b> and <b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_mailbox_maps">virtual_mail</a>-</b>
@ -195,18 +195,18 @@ MEMCACHE_TABLE(5) MEMCACHE_TABLE(5)
<b>ttl</b> parameter discussions in the MEMCACHE MAIN PARAMETERS section
above.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<a href="MEMCACHE_README.html">MEMCACHE_README</a>, Postfix memcache client guide
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
Memcache support was introduced with Postfix version 2.9.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

16
postfix/html/mongodb_table.5.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
MONGODB_TABLE(5) MONGODB_TABLE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
mongodb_table - Postfix MongoDB client configuration
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" <a href="mongodb_table.5.html">mongodb</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="mongodb_table.5.html">mongodb</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix mail system uses optional tables for address rewriting or
mail routing. These tables are usually in <b>dbm</b> or <b>db</b> format.
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ MONGODB_TABLE(5) MONGODB_TABLE(5)
unprivileged postfix user (specified with the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html#mail_owner">mail_owner</a> con-
figuration parameter).
<b>MONGODB PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="mongodb_parameters">MONGODB PARAMETERS</a></b>
<b>uri</b> The URI of mongo server/cluster that Postfix will try to connect
to and query from. Please see
<a href="https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/reference/connection-string/">https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/reference/connection-string/</a>
@ -185,18 +185,18 @@ MONGODB_TABLE(5) MONGODB_TABLE(5)
mally world-readable, and '$' in a mongodb parameter setting needs to
be written as '$$'.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table maintenance
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<a href="MONGODB_README.html">MONGODB_README</a>, Postfix MONGODB client guide
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
MongoDB support was introduced with Postfix version 3.9.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

24
postfix/html/mysql_table.5.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
MYSQL_TABLE(5) MYSQL_TABLE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
mysql_table - Postfix MySQL client configuration
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" <a href="mysql_table.5.html">mysql</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="mysql_table.5.html">mysql</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix mail system uses optional tables for address rewriting or
mail routing. These tables are usually in <b>dbm</b> or <b>db</b> format.
@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ MYSQL_TABLE(5) MYSQL_TABLE(5)
The file /etc/postfix/mysql-aliases.cf has the same format as the Post-
fix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> file, and can specify the parameters described below.
<b>LIST MEMBERSHIP</b>
<b><a name="list_membership">LIST MEMBERSHIP</a></b>
When using SQL to store lists such as $<a href="postconf.5.html#mynetworks">mynetworks</a>, $<a href="postconf.5.html#mydestination">mydestination</a>,
$<a href="postconf.5.html#relay_domains">relay_domains</a>, $<a href="postconf.5.html#local_recipient_maps">local_recipient_maps</a>, etc., it is important to under-
stand that the table must store each list member as a separate key. The
@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ MYSQL_TABLE(5) MYSQL_TABLE(5)
value. With SQL databases it is not uncommon to return the key itself
or a constant value.
<b>MYSQL PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="mysql_parameters">MYSQL PARAMETERS</a></b>
<b>hosts</b> The hosts that Postfix will try to connect to and query from.
Specify <i>unix:</i> for UNIX domain sockets, <i>inet:</i> for TCP connections
(default). Examples:
@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ MYSQL_TABLE(5) MYSQL_TABLE(5)
This parameter is available with Postfix 3.2 and later.
<b>TLS-RELATED SETTINGS</b>
<b><a name="tls-related_settings">TLS-RELATED SETTINGS</a></b>
See <a href="https://dev.mysql.com/doc/c-api/en/mysql-options.html">https://dev.mysql.com/doc/c-api/en/mysql-options.html</a> or
<a href="https://mariadb.com/kb/en/mysql_optionsv/">https://mariadb.com/kb/en/mysql_optionsv/</a> for details of the underlying
MYSQL_OPT_SSL_* features.
@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ MYSQL_TABLE(5) MYSQL_TABLE(5)
This parameter is available with Postfix 2.11 and later.
<b>USING MYSQL STORED PROCEDURES</b>
<b><a name="using_mysql_stored_procedures">USING MYSQL STORED PROCEDURES</a></b>
Postfix 3.2 and later support calling a stored procedure instead of
using a SELECT statement in the query, e.g.
@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ MYSQL_TABLE(5) MYSQL_TABLE(5)
in <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>, which is normally world-readable. Support for this form
will be removed in a future Postfix version.
<b>OBSOLETE QUERY INTERFACE</b>
<b><a name="obsolete_query_interface">OBSOLETE QUERY INTERFACE</a></b>
This section describes an interface that is deprecated as of Postfix
2.2. It is replaced by the more general <b>query</b> interface described
above. If the <b>query</b> parameter is defined, the legacy parameters
@ -374,21 +374,21 @@ MYSQL_TABLE(5) MYSQL_TABLE(5)
Additional conditions to the SQL query. Example:
<b>additional_conditions</b> = AND status = 'paid'
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table maintenance
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="ldap_table.5.html">ldap_table(5)</a>, LDAP lookup tables
<a href="pgsql_table.5.html">pgsql_table(5)</a>, PostgreSQL lookup tables
<a href="sqlite_table.5.html">sqlite_table(5)</a>, SQLite lookup tables
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<a href="MYSQL_README.html">MYSQL_README</a>, Postfix MYSQL client guide
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
MySQL support was introduced with Postfix version 1.0.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

36
postfix/html/newaliases.1.html
View File

@ -7,10 +7,10 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
sendmail - Postfix to Sendmail compatibility interface
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>sendmail</b> [<i>option ...</i>] [<i>recipient ...</i>]
<b>mailq</b>
@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<b>newaliases</b>
<b>sendmail -I</b>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix <a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>sendmail</b>(1)</a> command implements the Postfix to Sendmail com-
patibility interface. For the sake of compatibility with existing
applications, some Sendmail command-line options are recognized but
@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
Log mailer traffic. Use the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#debug_peer_list">debug_peer_list</a></b> and <b><a href="postconf.5.html#debug_peer_level">debug_peer_level</a></b>
configuration parameters instead.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
By design, this program is not set-user (or group) id. It is prepared
to handle message content from untrusted, possibly remote, users.
@ -318,11 +318,11 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>mail</b>(1)</a> command options, by specifying an email address that
starts with "<b>-</b>".
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>, and to the standard
error stream.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
<b>MAIL_CONFIG</b>
Directory with Postfix configuration files.
@ -336,19 +336,19 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<b>NAME</b> The sender full name. This is used only with messages that have
no <b>From:</b> message header. See also the <b>-F</b> option above.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this pro-
gram. The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>post-</b></a>
<a href="postconf.5.html"><b>conf</b>(5)</a> for more details including examples.
<b>COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="compatibility_controls">COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</a></b>
Available with Postfix 2.9 and later:
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#sendmail_fix_line_endings">sendmail_fix_line_endings</a> (always)</b>
Controls how the Postfix sendmail command converts email message
line endings from &lt;CR&gt;&lt;LF&gt; into UNIX format (&lt;LF&gt;).
<b>TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="trouble_shooting_controls">TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</a></b>
The <a href="DEBUG_README.html">DEBUG_README</a> file gives examples of how to troubleshoot a Postfix
system.
@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
verbose logging level to increase by the amount specified in
$<a href="postconf.5.html#debug_peer_level">debug_peer_level</a>.
<b>ACCESS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="access_controls">ACCESS CONTROLS</a></b>
Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later:
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#authorized_flush_users">authorized_flush_users</a> (<a href="DATABASE_README.html#types">static</a>:anyone)</b>
@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>mail</b>(1)</a> command (and with the privileged <a href="postdrop.1.html"><b>postdrop</b>(1)</a> helper com-
mand).
<b>RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="resource_and_rate_controls">RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#bounce_size_limit">bounce_size_limit</a> (50000)</b>
The maximal amount of original message text that is sent in a
non-delivery notification.
@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
The time between <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#deferred_queue">deferred queue</a> scans by the queue manager;
prior to Postfix 2.4 the default value was 1000s.
<b>FAST FLUSH CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="fast_flush_controls">FAST FLUSH CONTROLS</a></b>
The <a href="ETRN_README.html">ETRN_README</a> file describes configuration and operation details for
the Postfix "fast flush" service.
@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
Optional list of destinations that are eligible for per-destina-
tion logfiles with mail that is queued to those destinations.
<b>VERP CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="verp_controls">VERP CONTROLS</a></b>
The <a href="VERP_README.html">VERP_README</a> file describes configuration and operation details of
Postfix support for variable envelope return path addresses.
@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
The characters Postfix accepts as VERP delimiter characters on
the Postfix <a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>sendmail</b>(1)</a> command line and in SMTP commands.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#alias_database">alias_database</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The alias databases for <a href="local.8.html"><b>local</b>(8)</a> delivery that are updated with
"<b>newaliases</b>" or with "<b>sendmail -bi</b>".
@ -483,11 +483,11 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
the default Postfix instance, and that are started, stopped,
etc., together with the default Postfix instance.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix, mail queue
/etc/postfix, configuration files
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="pickup.8.html">pickup(8)</a>, mail pickup daemon
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
<a href="smtpd.8.html">smtpd(8)</a>, SMTP server
@ -500,14 +500,14 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README_FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README_FILES</a></b>
Use "<b>postconf <a href="postconf.5.html#readme_directory">readme_directory</a></b>" or "<b>postconf <a href="postconf.5.html#html_directory">html_directory</a></b>" to locate
this information.
<a href="DEBUG_README.html">DEBUG_README</a>, Postfix debugging howto
<a href="ETRN_README.html">ETRN_README</a>, Postfix ETRN howto
<a href="VERP_README.html">VERP_README</a>, Postfix VERP howto
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

16
postfix/html/nisplus_table.5.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
NISPLUS_TABLE(5) NISPLUS_TABLE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
nisplus_table - Postfix NIS+ client
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" "<a href="nisplus_table.5.html">nisplus</a>:[</b><i>name</i><b>=%s];</b><i>name.name.</i><b>"</b>
<b>postmap -q - "<a href="nisplus_table.5.html">nisplus</a>:[</b><i>name</i><b>=%s];</b><i>name.name.</i><b>"</b> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix mail system uses optional lookup tables. These tables are
usually in <b>dbm</b> or <b>db</b> format. Alternatively, lookup tables can be spec-
ified as NIS+ databases.
@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ NISPLUS_TABLE(5) NISPLUS_TABLE(5)
To test Postfix NIS+ lookup tables, use the "<b>postmap -q</b>" command as
described in the SYNOPSIS above.
<b>QUERY SYNTAX</b>
<b><a name="query_syntax">QUERY SYNTAX</a></b>
Most of the NIS+ query is specified via the NIS+ map name. The general
format of a Postfix NIS+ map name is as follows:
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ NISPLUS_TABLE(5) NISPLUS_TABLE(5)
column that provides the lookup result. When no ":<i>column</i>" is
specified the first column (1) is used.
<b>EXAMPLE</b>
<b><a name="example">EXAMPLE</a></b>
A NIS+ aliases map might be queried as follows:
<a href="postconf.5.html#alias_maps">alias_maps</a> = <a href="DATABASE_README.html#types">dbm</a>:/etc/mail/aliases,
@ -57,13 +57,13 @@ NISPLUS_TABLE(5) NISPLUS_TABLE(5)
This queries the local aliases file before the NIS+ file.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

46
postfix/html/oqmgr.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
oqmgr - old Postfix queue manager
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>oqmgr</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>oqmgr</b>(8)</a> daemon awaits the arrival of incoming mail and arranges
for its delivery via Postfix delivery processes. The actual mail rout-
ing strategy is delegated to the <a href="trivial-rewrite.8.html"><b>trivial-rewrite</b>(8)</a> daemon. This pro-
@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
carded. This stops potential loops caused by undeliverable bounce
notifications.
<b>MAIL QUEUES</b>
<b><a name="mail_queues">MAIL QUEUES</a></b>
The <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>oqmgr</b>(8)</a> daemon maintains the following queues:
<b>incoming</b>
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
<b>hold</b> Messages that are kept "on hold" are kept here until someone
sets them free.
<b>DELIVERY STATUS REPORTS</b>
<b><a name="delivery_status_reports">DELIVERY STATUS REPORTS</a></b>
The <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>oqmgr</b>(8)</a> daemon keeps an eye on per-message delivery status reports
in the following directories. Each status report file has the same name
as the corresponding message file:
@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
The <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>oqmgr</b>(8)</a> daemon is responsible for asking the <a href="bounce.8.html"><b>bounce</b>(8)</a>, <a href="defer.8.html"><b>defer</b>(8)</a>
or <a href="trace.8.html"><b>trace</b>(8)</a> daemons to send delivery reports.
<b>STRATEGIES</b>
<b><a name="strategies">STRATEGIES</a></b>
The queue manager implements a variety of strategies for either opening
queue files (input) or for message delivery (output).
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
taining a short-term, in-memory list of unreachable destina-
tions.
<b>TRIGGERS</b>
<b><a name="triggers">TRIGGERS</a></b>
On an idle system, the queue manager waits for the arrival of trigger
events, or it waits for a timer to go off. A trigger is a one-byte mes-
sage. Depending on the message received, the queue manager performs
@ -133,18 +133,18 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
<a href="QSHAPE_README.html#deferred_queue">deferred queue</a> run, one would request <b>A F D</b>; in order to notify the
queue manager of the arrival of new mail one would request <b>I</b>.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3463">RFC 3463</a> (Enhanced status codes)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3464">RFC 3464</a> (Delivery status notifications)
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>oqmgr</b>(8)</a> daemon is not security sensitive. It reads single-charac-
ter messages from untrusted local users, and thus may be susceptible to
denial of service attacks. The <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>oqmgr</b>(8)</a> daemon does not talk to the
outside world, and it can be run at fixed low privilege in a chrooted
environment.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to the <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>
daemon. Corrupted message files are saved to the <b>corrupt</b> queue for
further inspection.
@ -152,12 +152,12 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
Depending on the setting of the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#notify_classes">notify_classes</a></b> parameter, the postmas-
ter is notified of bounces and of other trouble.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
A single queue manager process has to compete for disk access with mul-
tiple front-end processes such as <a href="cleanup.8.html"><b>cleanup</b>(8)</a>. A sudden burst of inbound
mail can negatively impact outbound delivery rates.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are not picked up automatically, as <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>oqmgr</b>(8)</a> is a
persistent process. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>" after a configura-
tion change.
@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
In the text below, <i>transport</i> is the first field in a <a href="master.5.html"><b>master.cf</b></a> entry.
<b>COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="compatibility_controls">COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</a></b>
Available before Postfix version 2.5:
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#allow_min_user">allow_min_user</a> (no)</b>
@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
next-hop destination, use $<a href="postconf.5.html#default_filter_nexthop">default_filter_nexthop</a> instead; when
that value is empty, use the domain in the recipient address.
<b><a href="QSHAPE_README.html#active_queue">ACTIVE QUEUE</a> CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="active_queue_controls">ACTIVE QUEUE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#qmgr_clog_warn_time">qmgr_clog_warn_time</a> (300s)</b>
The minimal delay between warnings that a specific destination
is clogging up the Postfix <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#active_queue">active queue</a>.
@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
queue manager, and the maximal size of the short-term, in-memory
"dead" destination status cache.
<b>DELIVERY CONCURRENCY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="delivery_concurrency_controls">DELIVERY CONCURRENCY CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#qmgr_fudge_factor">qmgr_fudge_factor</a> (100)</b>
Obsolete feature: the percentage of delivery resources that a
busy mail system will use up for delivery of a large mailing
@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
Make the queue manager's feedback algorithm verbose for perfor-
mance analysis purposes.
<b>RECIPIENT SCHEDULING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="recipient_scheduling_controls">RECIPIENT SCHEDULING CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#default_destination_recipient_limit">default_destination_recipient_limit</a> (50)</b>
The default maximal number of recipients per message delivery.
@ -269,7 +269,7 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
<a href="postconf.5.html#default_destination_recipient_limit">ient_limit</a> parameter value, where <i>transport</i> is the <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a>
name of the message delivery transport.
<b>OTHER RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="other_resource_and_rate_controls">OTHER RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#minimal_backoff_time">minimal_backoff_time</a> (300s)</b>
The minimal time between attempts to deliver a deferred message;
prior to Postfix 2.4 the default value was 1000s.
@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
the parameter name is the <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> name of the message delivery
transport.
<b>SAFETY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="safety_controls">SAFETY CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#qmgr_daemon_timeout">qmgr_daemon_timeout</a> (1000s)</b>
How much time a Postfix queue manager process may take to handle
a request before it is terminated by a built-in watchdog timer.
@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
A safety limit that prevents address verification requests from
overwhelming the Postfix queue.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
The email address form that will be used in non-debug logging
(info, warning, etc.).
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix/incoming, <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#incoming_queue">incoming queue</a>
/var/spool/postfix/active, <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#active_queue">active queue</a>
/var/spool/postfix/deferred, <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#deferred_queue">deferred queue</a>
@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
/var/spool/postfix/defer, non-delivery status
/var/spool/postfix/trace, delivery status
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="trivial-rewrite.8.html">trivial-rewrite(8)</a>, address routing
<a href="bounce.8.html">bounce(8)</a>, delivery status reports
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
@ -404,10 +404,10 @@ OQMGR(8) OQMGR(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="QSHAPE_README.html">QSHAPE_README</a>, Postfix queue analysis
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

26
postfix/html/pcre_table.5.html
View File

@ -7,10 +7,10 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
PCRE_TABLE(5) PCRE_TABLE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
pcre_table - format of Postfix PCRE tables
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ PCRE_TABLE(5) PCRE_TABLE(5)
<b>postmap -bmq - <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix mail system uses optional tables for address rewriting,
mail routing, or access control. These tables are usually in <b>dbm</b> or <b>db</b>
format.
@ -40,12 +40,12 @@ PCRE_TABLE(5) PCRE_TABLE(5)
This driver can be built with the pcre2 library (Postfix 3.7 and
later), or with the legacy pcre library (all Postfix versions).
<b>COMPATIBILITY</b>
<b><a name="compatibility">COMPATIBILITY</a></b>
With Postfix version 2.2 and earlier specify "<b>postmap -fq</b>" to query a
table that contains case sensitive patterns. Patterns are case insensi-
tive by default.
<b>TABLE FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="table_format">TABLE FORMAT</a></b>
The general form of a PCRE table is:
<b>/</b><i>pattern</i><b>/</b><i>flags result</i>
@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ PCRE_TABLE(5) PCRE_TABLE(5)
This feature is not supported with PCRE2.
<b>SEARCH ORDER</b>
<b><a name="search_order">SEARCH ORDER</a></b>
Patterns are applied in the order as specified in the table, until a
pattern is found that matches the input string.
@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ PCRE_TABLE(5) PCRE_TABLE(5)
ken up into their <i>user</i> and <i>domain</i> constituent parts, nor is <i>user+foo</i>
broken up into <i>user</i> and <i>foo</i>.
<b>TEXT SUBSTITUTION</b>
<b><a name="text_substitution">TEXT SUBSTITUTION</a></b>
Substitution of substrings (text that matches patterns inside "()")
from the matched expression into the result string is requested with
$1, $2, etc.; specify $$ to produce a $ character as output. The
@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ PCRE_TABLE(5) PCRE_TABLE(5)
the expression does not match, substitutions are not available for
negated patterns.
<b>INLINE SPECIFICATION</b>
<b><a name="inline_specification">INLINE SPECIFICATION</a></b>
The contents of a table may be specified in the table name (Postfix 3.7
and later). The basic syntax is:
@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ PCRE_TABLE(5) PCRE_TABLE(5)
able metacharacters such as '.' in the <i>$name</i> expansion. Otherwise, the
pattern may have unexpected matches.
<b>EXAMPLE SMTPD ACCESS MAP</b>
<b><a name="example_smtpd_access_map">EXAMPLE SMTPD ACCESS MAP</a></b>
# Protect your outgoing majordomo exploders
/^(?!owner-)(.*)-outgoing@(.*)/ 550 Use ${1}@${2} instead
@ -212,23 +212,23 @@ PCRE_TABLE(5) PCRE_TABLE(5)
550 This user is a funny one. You really don't want to send mail to
them as it only makes their head spin.
<b>EXAMPLE HEADER FILTER MAP</b>
<b><a name="example_header_filter_map">EXAMPLE HEADER FILTER MAP</a></b>
/^Subject: make money fast/ REJECT
/^To: friend@public\.com/ REJECT
<b>EXAMPLE BODY FILTER MAP</b>
<b><a name="example_body_filter_map">EXAMPLE BODY FILTER MAP</a></b>
# First skip over base 64 encoded text to save CPU cycles.
# Requires PCRE version 3.
~^[[:alnum:]+/]{60,}$~ OK
# Put your own body patterns here.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp_table(5)</a>, format of POSIX regular expression tables
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

20
postfix/html/pgsql_table.5.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
PGSQL_TABLE(5) PGSQL_TABLE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
pgsql_table - Postfix PostgreSQL client configuration
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" <a href="pgsql_table.5.html">pgsql</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="pgsql_table.5.html">pgsql</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix mail system uses optional tables for address rewriting or
mail routing. These tables are usually in <b>dbm</b> or <b>db</b> format.
@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ PGSQL_TABLE(5) PGSQL_TABLE(5)
The file /etc/postfix/pgsql-aliases.cf has the same format as the Post-
fix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> file, and can specify the parameters described below.
<b>LIST MEMBERSHIP</b>
<b><a name="list_membership">LIST MEMBERSHIP</a></b>
When using SQL to store lists such as $<a href="postconf.5.html#mynetworks">mynetworks</a>, $<a href="postconf.5.html#mydestination">mydestination</a>,
$<a href="postconf.5.html#relay_domains">relay_domains</a>, $<a href="postconf.5.html#local_recipient_maps">local_recipient_maps</a>, etc., it is important to under-
stand that the table must store each list member as a separate key. The
@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ PGSQL_TABLE(5) PGSQL_TABLE(5)
value. With SQL databases it is not uncommon to return the key itself
or a constant value.
<b>PGSQL PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="pgsql_parameters">PGSQL PARAMETERS</a></b>
<b>hosts</b> The hosts that Postfix will try to connect to and query from.
Besides a <b>postgresql://</b> connection URI, this setting supports
the historical forms <b>unix:/</b><i>pathname</i> for UNIX-domain sockets and
@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ PGSQL_TABLE(5) PGSQL_TABLE(5)
written in <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>, which is normally world-readable. Support for this
form will be removed in a future Postfix version.
<b>OBSOLETE QUERY INTERFACES</b>
<b><a name="obsolete_query_interfaces">OBSOLETE QUERY INTERFACES</a></b>
This section describes query interfaces that are deprecated as of Post-
fix 2.2. Please migrate to the new <b>query</b> interface as the old inter-
faces are slated to be phased out.
@ -286,21 +286,21 @@ PGSQL_TABLE(5) PGSQL_TABLE(5)
Additional conditions to the SQL query. Example:
<b>additional_conditions</b> = AND status = 'paid'
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="ldap_table.5.html">ldap_table(5)</a>, LDAP lookup tables
<a href="mysql_table.5.html">mysql_table(5)</a>, MySQL lookup tables
<a href="sqlite_table.5.html">sqlite_table(5)</a>, SQLite lookup tables
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<a href="PGSQL_README.html">PGSQL_README</a>, Postfix PostgreSQL client guide
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
PgSQL support was introduced with Postfix version 2.1.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

24
postfix/html/pickup.8.html
View File

@ -7,22 +7,22 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
PICKUP(8) PICKUP(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
pickup - Postfix local mail pickup
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>pickup</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="pickup.8.html"><b>pickup</b>(8)</a> daemon waits for hints that new mail has been dropped
into the <b>maildrop</b> directory, and feeds it into the <a href="cleanup.8.html"><b>cleanup</b>(8)</a> daemon.
Ill-formatted files are deleted without notifying the originator. This
program expects to be run from the <a href="master.8.html"><b>master</b>(8)</a> process manager.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
None. The <a href="pickup.8.html"><b>pickup</b>(8)</a> daemon does not interact with the outside world.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="pickup.8.html"><b>pickup</b>(8)</a> daemon is moderately security sensitive. It runs with
fixed low privilege and can run in a chrooted environment. However,
the program reads files from potentially hostile users. The <a href="pickup.8.html"><b>pickup</b>(8)</a>
@ -30,16 +30,16 @@ PICKUP(8) PICKUP(8)
for reading, and does not actually touch any data that is sent to its
public service endpoint.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
The <a href="pickup.8.html"><b>pickup</b>(8)</a> daemon copies mail from file to the <a href="cleanup.8.html"><b>cleanup</b>(8)</a> daemon.
It could avoid message copying overhead by sending a file descriptor
instead of file data, but then the already complex <a href="cleanup.8.html"><b>cleanup</b>(8)</a> daemon
would have to deal with unfiltered user data.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
As the <a href="pickup.8.html"><b>pickup</b>(8)</a> daemon is a relatively long-running process, up to an
hour may pass before a <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> change takes effect. Use the command
"<b>postfix reload</b>" command to speed up a change.
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ PICKUP(8) PICKUP(8)
The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for
more details including examples.
<b>CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="content_inspection_controls">CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#content_filter">content_filter</a> (empty)</b>
After the message is queued, send the entire message to the
specified <i>transport:destination</i>.
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ PICKUP(8) PICKUP(8)
Enable or disable recipient validation, built-in content filter-
ing, or address mapping.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ PICKUP(8) PICKUP(8)
The email address form that will be used in non-debug logging
(info, warning, etc.).
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="cleanup.8.html">cleanup(8)</a>, message canonicalization
<a href="sendmail.1.html">sendmail(1)</a>, Sendmail-compatible interface
<a href="postdrop.1.html">postdrop(1)</a>, mail posting agent
@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ PICKUP(8) PICKUP(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

26
postfix/html/pipe.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
PIPE(8) PIPE(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
pipe - Postfix delivery to external command
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>pipe</b> [generic Postfix daemon options] command_attributes...
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="pipe.8.html"><b>pipe</b>(8)</a> daemon processes requests from the Postfix queue manager to
deliver messages to external commands. This program expects to be run
from the <a href="master.8.html"><b>master</b>(8)</a> process manager.
@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ PIPE(8) PIPE(8)
again at a later time. Delivery status reports are sent to the
<a href="bounce.8.html"><b>bounce</b>(8)</a>, <a href="defer.8.html"><b>defer</b>(8)</a> or <a href="trace.8.html"><b>trace</b>(8)</a> daemon as appropriate.
<b>SINGLE-RECIPIENT DELIVERY</b>
<b><a name="single-recipient_delivery">SINGLE-RECIPIENT DELIVERY</a></b>
Some destinations cannot handle more than one recipient per delivery
request. Examples are pagers or fax machines. In addition,
multi-recipient delivery is undesirable when prepending a <b>Delivered-to:</b>
@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ PIPE(8) PIPE(8)
column of the Postfix <a href="master.5.html"><b>master.cf</b></a> entry for the pipe-based delivery
transport.
<b>COMMAND ATTRIBUTE SYNTAX</b>
<b><a name="command_attribute_syntax">COMMAND ATTRIBUTE SYNTAX</a></b>
The external command attributes are given in the <a href="master.5.html"><b>master.cf</b></a> file at the
end of a service definition. The syntax is as follows:
@ -353,10 +353,10 @@ PIPE(8) PIPE(8)
This information is modified by the <b>u</b> flag for case fold-
ing.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3463">RFC 3463</a> (Enhanced status codes)
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Command exit status codes are expected to follow the conventions
defined in &lt;<b>sysexits.h</b>&gt;. Exit status 0 means normal successful comple-
tion.
@ -376,12 +376,12 @@ PIPE(8) PIPE(8)
Corrupted message files are marked so that the queue manager can move
them to the <b>corrupt</b> queue for further inspection.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
This program needs a dual personality 1) to access the private Postfix
queue and IPC mechanisms, and 2) to execute external commands as the
specified user. It is therefore security sensitive.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automatically as <a href="pipe.8.html"><b>pipe</b>(8)</a> processes run
for only a limited amount of time. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>" to
speed up a change.
@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ PIPE(8) PIPE(8)
The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for
more details including examples.
<b>RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="resource_and_rate_controls">RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</a></b>
In the text below, <i>transport</i> is the first field in a <a href="master.5.html"><b>master.cf</b></a> entry.
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#transport_time_limit">transport_time_limit</a> ($<a href="postconf.5.html#command_time_limit">command_time_limit</a>)</b>
@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ PIPE(8) PIPE(8)
<a href="postconf.5.html#default_destination_recipient_limit">ient_limit</a> parameter value, where <i>transport</i> is the <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a>
name of the message delivery transport.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ PIPE(8) PIPE(8)
The email address form that will be used in non-debug logging
(info, warning, etc.).
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
<a href="bounce.8.html">bounce(8)</a>, delivery status reports
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
@ -496,7 +496,7 @@ PIPE(8) PIPE(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

20
postfix/html/postalias.1.html
View File

@ -7,14 +7,14 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTALIAS(1) POSTALIAS(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postalias - Postfix alias database maintenance
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postalias</b> [<b>-Nfinoprsuvw</b>] [<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>] [<b>-d</b> <i>key</i>] [<b>-q</b> <i>key</i>]
[<i>file</i><b>_</b><i>type</i>:]<i>file</i><b>_</b><i>name</i> ...
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="postalias.1.html"><b>postalias</b>(1)</a> command creates or queries one or more Postfix alias
databases, or updates an existing one. The input and output file for-
mats are expected to be compatible with Sendmail version 8, and are
@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ POSTALIAS(1) POSTALIAS(1)
The name of the alias database source file when creating a data-
base.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems are logged to the standard error stream and to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or
<a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>. No output means that no problems were detected. Duplicate
entries are skipped and are flagged with a warning.
@ -164,14 +164,14 @@ POSTALIAS(1) POSTALIAS(1)
(including successful "<b>postalias -q</b>" lookup) and terminates with
non-zero exit status in case of failure.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
<b>MAIL_CONFIG</b>
Directory with Postfix configuration files.
<b>MAIL_VERBOSE</b>
Enable verbose logging for debugging purposes.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this pro-
gram.
@ -219,10 +219,10 @@ POSTALIAS(1) POSTALIAS(1)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#lmdb_map_size">lmdb_map_size</a> (16777216)</b>
The initial OpenLDAP LMDB database size limit in bytes.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc822">RFC 822</a> (ARPA Internet Text Messages)
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="aliases.5.html">aliases(5)</a>, format of alias database input file.
<a href="local.8.html">local(8)</a>, Postfix local delivery agent.
<a href="postconf.1.html">postconf(1)</a>, supported database types
@ -232,10 +232,10 @@ POSTALIAS(1) POSTALIAS(1)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

18
postfix/html/postcat.1.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTCAT(1) POSTCAT(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postcat - show Postfix queue file contents
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postcat</b> [<b>-bdefhnoqv</b>] [<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>] [<i>files</i>...]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="postcat.1.html"><b>postcat</b>(1)</a> command prints the contents of the named <i>files</i> in
human-readable form. The files are expected to be in Postfix queue file
format. If no <i>files</i> are specified on the command line, the program
@ -70,14 +70,14 @@ POSTCAT(1) POSTCAT(1)
<b>-v</b> Enable verbose logging for debugging purposes. Multiple <b>-v</b>
options make the software increasingly verbose.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems are reported to the standard error stream.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
<b>MAIL_CONFIG</b>
Directory with Postfix configuration files.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this pro-
gram.
@ -96,13 +96,13 @@ POSTCAT(1) POSTCAT(1)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#queue_directory">queue_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The location of the Postfix top-level queue directory.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix, Postfix queue directory
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, Postfix configuration
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

20
postfix/html/postconf.1.html
View File

@ -7,10 +7,10 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTCONF(1) POSTCONF(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postconf - Postfix configuration utility
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>Managing <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>:</b>
<b>postconf</b> [<b>-dfhHnopqvx</b>] [<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>] [<b>-C</b> <i>class,...</i>] [<i>parameter ...</i>]
@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ POSTCONF(1) POSTCONF(1)
<b>postconf -a</b>|<b>-A</b>|<b>-l</b>|<b>-m</b> [<b>-v</b>] [<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
By default, the <a href="postconf.1.html"><b>postconf</b>(1)</a> command displays the values of <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> con-
figuration parameters, and warns about possible mis-typed parameter
names (Postfix 2.9 and later). The command can also change <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a>
@ -526,14 +526,14 @@ POSTCONF(1) POSTCONF(1)
This feature is available with Postfix 2.6 and later. Support
for -M was added with Postfix 2.11.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems are reported to the standard error stream.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
<b>MAIL_CONFIG</b>
Directory with Postfix configuration files.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this pro-
gram.
@ -547,19 +547,19 @@ POSTCONF(1) POSTCONF(1)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#bounce_template_file">bounce_template_file</a> (empty)</b>
Pathname of a configuration file with bounce message templates.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/etc/postfix/<a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>, Postfix configuration parameters
/etc/postfix/<a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a>, Postfix master daemon configuration
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="bounce.5.html">bounce(5)</a>, bounce template file format
<a href="master.5.html">master(5)</a>, <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> configuration file syntax
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> configuration file syntax
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

20
postfix/html/postdrop.1.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTDROP(1) POSTDROP(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postdrop - Postfix mail posting utility
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postdrop</b> [<b>-rv</b>] [<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="postdrop.1.html"><b>postdrop</b>(1)</a> command creates a file in the <b>maildrop</b> directory and
copies its standard input to the file.
@ -32,18 +32,18 @@ POSTDROP(1) POSTDROP(1)
options make the software increasingly verbose. As of Postfix
2.3, this option is available for the super-user only.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The command is designed to run with set-group ID privileges, so that it
can write to the <b>maildrop</b> queue directory and so that it can connect to
Postfix daemon processes.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Fatal errors: malformed input, I/O error, out of memory. Problems are
logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a> and to the standard error stream.
When the input is incomplete, or when the process receives a HUP, INT,
QUIT or TERM signal, the queue file is deleted.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
MAIL_CONFIG
Directory with the <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> file. In order to avoid exploitation
of set-group ID privileges, a non-standard directory is allowed
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ POSTDROP(1) POSTDROP(1)
<b>o</b> The command is invoked by the super-user.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this pro-
gram. The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>post-</b></a>
<a href="postconf.5.html"><b>conf</b>(5)</a> for more details including examples.
@ -110,16 +110,16 @@ POSTDROP(1) POSTDROP(1)
The set of characters that can separate an email address local-
part, user name, or a .forward file name from its extension.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix/<a href="QSHAPE_README.html#maildrop_queue">maildrop</a>, <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#maildrop_queue">maildrop queue</a>
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="sendmail.1.html">sendmail(1)</a>, compatibility interface
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

18
postfix/html/postfix-tls.1.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTFIX-TLS(1) POSTFIX-TLS(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postfix-tls - Postfix TLS management
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b><a href="postfix-tls.1.html">postfix tls</a></b> <i>subcommand</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The "<b><a href="postfix-tls.1.html">postfix tls</a></b> <i>subcommand</i>" feature enables opportunistic TLS in the
Postfix SMTP client or server, and manages Postfix SMTP server private
keys and certificates.
@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ POSTFIX-TLS(1) POSTFIX-TLS(1)
The default <i>keyfile</i> list consists of the two supported algo-
rithms <b>rsa</b> and <b>ecdsa</b>.
<b>AUXILIARY COMMANDS</b>
<b><a name="auxiliary_commands">AUXILIARY COMMANDS</a></b>
<b>all-default-client</b>
Exit with status 0 (success) if all SMTP client TLS settings are
at their default values. Otherwise, exit with a non-zero status.
@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ POSTFIX-TLS(1) POSTFIX-TLS(1)
<b><a href="postfix-tls.1.html">postfix tls</a> all-default-server</b> &amp;&amp;
<b><a href="postfix-tls.1.html">postfix tls</a> enable-server</b>
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The "<b><a href="postfix-tls.1.html">postfix tls</a></b> <i>subcommand</i>" feature reads or updates the following
configuration parameters.
@ -221,17 +221,17 @@ POSTFIX-TLS(1) POSTFIX-TLS(1)
The external entropy source for the in-memory <a href="tlsmgr.8.html"><b>tlsmgr</b>(8)</a> pseudo
random number generator (PRNG) pool.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="master.8.html">master(8)</a> Postfix master program
<a href="postfix.1.html">postfix(1)</a> Postfix administrative interface
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="TLS_README.html">TLS_README</a>, Postfix TLS configuration and operation
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
The "<b><a href="postfix-tls.1.html">postfix tls</a></b>" command was introduced with Postfix version 3.1.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

24
postfix/html/postfix-wrapper.5.html
View File

@ -7,10 +7,10 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5) POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postfix-wrapper - Postfix multi-instance API
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
Support for managing multiple Postfix instances is available as of ver-
sion 2.6. Instances share executable files and documentation, but have
their own directories for configuration, queue and data files.
@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5) POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5)
required. This instance is identified by the <a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> parame-
ter's default value.
<b>GENERAL OPERATION</b>
<b><a name="general_operation">GENERAL OPERATION</a></b>
Multi-instance support is backwards compatible: when you run only one
Postfix instance, commands such as "postfix start" will not change
behavior at all.
@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5) POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5)
This enumerates the status of all Postfix instances within a
multi-instance configuration.
<b>MANAGING AN INDIVIDUAL POSTFIX INSTANCE</b>
<b><a name="managing_an_individual_postfix_instance">MANAGING AN INDIVIDUAL POSTFIX INSTANCE</a></b>
To manage a specific Postfix instance, specify its configuration direc-
tory on the <a href="postfix.1.html">postfix(1)</a> command line:
@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5) POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5)
exit $err
<b>PER-INSTANCE MULTI-INSTANCE MANAGER CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="per-instance_multi-instance_manager_controls">PER-INSTANCE MULTI-INSTANCE MANAGER CONTROLS</a></b>
Each Postfix instance has its own <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> file with parameters that
control how the multi-instance manager operates on that instance. This
section discusses the most important settings.
@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5) POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5)
"check" so that problems will be reported even when the instance is
disabled.
<b>MAINTAINING SHARED AND NON-SHARED FILES</b>
<b><a name="maintaining_shared_and_non-shared_files">MAINTAINING SHARED AND NON-SHARED FILES</a></b>
Some files are shared between Postfix instances, such as executables
and manpages, and some files are per-instance, such as configuration
files, mail queue files, and data files. See the NON-SHARED FILES sec-
@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5) POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5)
The consequence of this approach is that the default Postfix instance
should be checked and updated before any other instances.
<b>MULTI-INSTANCE API SUMMARY</b>
<b><a name="multi-instance_api_summary">MULTI-INSTANCE API SUMMARY</a></b>
Only the multi-instance manager implements support for the
<a href="postconf.5.html#multi_instance_enable">multi_instance_enable</a> configuration parameter. The multi-instance man-
ager will start only Postfix instances whose <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> file has
@ -205,14 +205,14 @@ POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5) POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5)
Postfix, or that are not managed together with the default Postfix
instance.
<b>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</b>
<b><a name="environment_variables">ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</a></b>
MAIL_CONFIG
When present, this forces the <a href="postfix.1.html">postfix(1)</a> command to operate only
on the specified Postfix instance. This environment variable is
exported by the <a href="postfix.1.html">postfix(1)</a> -c option, so that <a href="postfix.1.html">postfix(1)</a> com-
mands in descendant processes will work correctly.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a> for
more details.
@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5) POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5)
Allow this Postfix instance to be started, stopped, etc., by a
multi-instance manager.
<b>NON-SHARED FILES</b>
<b><a name="non-shared_files">NON-SHARED FILES</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -250,12 +250,12 @@ POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5) POSTFIX-WRAPPER(5)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#queue_directory">queue_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The location of the Postfix top-level queue directory.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postfix.1.html">postfix(1)</a> Postfix control program
<a href="postmulti.1.html">postmulti(1)</a> full-blown multi-instance manager
$<a href="postconf.5.html#daemon_directory">daemon_directory</a>/postfix-wrapper simple multi-instance manager
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

18
postfix/html/postfix.1.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTFIX(1) POSTFIX(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postfix - Postfix control program
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postfix</b> [<b>-Dv</b>] [<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>] <i>command</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
This command is reserved for the superuser. To submit mail, use the
Postfix <a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>sendmail</b>(1)</a> command.
@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ POSTFIX(1) POSTFIX(1)
<b>-v</b> Enable verbose logging for debugging purposes. Multiple <b>-v</b>
options make the software increasingly verbose.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
The <a href="postfix.1.html"><b>postfix</b>(1)</a> command exports the following environment variables
before executing the <b>postfix-script</b> file:
@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ POSTFIX(1) POSTFIX(1)
<b>POSTLOG_HOSTNAME</b>
The hostname to prepend to internal logging.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> configuration parameters are exported as environ-
ment variables with the same names:
@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ POSTFIX(1) POSTFIX(1)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#postlog_service_name">postlog_service_name</a> (postlog)</b>
The name of the <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a> service entry in <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a>.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
Prior to Postfix version 2.6, all of the following files were in <b>$<a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">con</a>-</b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">fig_directory</a></b>. Some files are now in <b>$<a href="postconf.5.html#daemon_directory">daemon_directory</a></b> or <b>$meta_direc-</b>
<b>tory</b> so that they can be shared among multiple instances that run the
@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ POSTFIX(1) POSTFIX(1)
$<a href="postconf.5.html#meta_directory">meta_directory</a>/dynamicmaps.cf, plug-in database clients
$<a href="postconf.5.html#meta_directory">meta_directory</a>/postfix-files, file/directory permissions
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
Commands:
<a href="postalias.1.html">postalias(1)</a>, create/update/query alias database
<a href="postcat.1.html">postcat(1)</a>, examine Postfix queue file
@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ POSTFIX(1) POSTFIX(1)
Other:
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="OVERVIEW.html">OVERVIEW</a>, overview of Postfix commands and processes
<a href="BASIC_CONFIGURATION_README.html">BASIC_CONFIGURATION_README</a>, Postfix basic configuration
<a href="ADDRESS_REWRITING_README.html">ADDRESS_REWRITING_README</a>, Postfix address rewriting
@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ POSTFIX(1) POSTFIX(1)
<a href="CONTENT_INSPECTION_README.html">CONTENT_INSPECTION_README</a>, Postfix content inspection
<a href="QSHAPE_README.html">QSHAPE_README</a>, Postfix queue analysis
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

18
postfix/html/postkick.1.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTKICK(1) POSTKICK(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postkick - kick a Postfix service
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postkick</b> [<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>] [<b>-v</b>] <i>class service request</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="postkick.1.html"><b>postkick</b>(1)</a> command sends <i>request</i> to the specified <i>service</i> over a
local transport channel. This command makes Postfix private IPC acces-
sible for use in, for example, shell scripts.
@ -39,17 +39,17 @@ POSTKICK(1) POSTKICK(1)
<i>request</i>
A string. The list of valid requests is service-specific.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to the standard error stream.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
<b>MAIL_CONFIG</b>
Directory with Postfix configuration files.
<b>MAIL_VERBOSE</b>
Enable verbose logging for debugging purposes.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this pro-
gram. The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>post-</b></a>
<a href="postconf.5.html"><b>conf</b>(5)</a> for more details including examples.
@ -70,16 +70,16 @@ POSTKICK(1) POSTKICK(1)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#queue_directory">queue_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The location of the Postfix top-level queue directory.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix/private, private class endpoints
/var/spool/postfix/public, public class endpoints
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager trigger protocol
<a href="pickup.8.html">pickup(8)</a>, local pickup daemon
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

24
postfix/html/postlock.1.html
View File

@ -7,14 +7,14 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTLOCK(1) POSTLOCK(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postlock - lock mail folder and execute command
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postlock</b> [<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>] [<b>-l</b> <i>lock</i><b>_</b><i>style</i>]
[<b>-v</b>] <i>file command...</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="postlock.1.html"><b>postlock</b>(1)</a> command locks <i>file</i> for exclusive access, and executes
<i>command</i>. The locking method is compatible with the Postfix UNIX-style
local delivery agent.
@ -41,29 +41,29 @@ POSTLOCK(1) POSTLOCK(1)
access. The command is executed directly, i.e. without inter-
pretation by a shell command interpreter.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
The result status is 75 (EX_TEMPFAIL) when <a href="postlock.1.html"><b>postlock</b>(1)</a> could not per-
form the requested operation. Otherwise, the exit status is the exit
status from the command.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
With remote file systems, the ability to acquire a lock does not neces-
sarily eliminate access conflicts. Avoid file access by processes run-
ning on different machines.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
<b>MAIL_CONFIG</b>
Directory with Postfix configuration files.
<b>MAIL_VERBOSE</b>
Enable verbose logging for debugging purposes.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this pro-
gram. The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>post-</b></a>
<a href="postconf.5.html"><b>conf</b>(5)</a> for more details including examples.
<b>LOCKING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="locking_controls">LOCKING CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#deliver_lock_attempts">deliver_lock_attempts</a> (20)</b>
The maximal number of attempts to acquire an exclusive lock on a
mailbox file or <a href="bounce.8.html"><b>bounce</b>(8)</a> logfile.
@ -80,14 +80,14 @@ POSTLOCK(1) POSTLOCK(1)
How to lock a UNIX-style <a href="local.8.html"><b>local</b>(8)</a> mailbox before attempting
delivery.
<b>RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="resource_and_rate_controls">RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#fork_attempts">fork_attempts</a> (5)</b>
The maximal number of attempts to fork() a child process.
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#fork_delay">fork_delay</a> (1s)</b>
The delay between attempts to fork() a child process.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -97,10 +97,10 @@ POSTLOCK(1) POSTLOCK(1)
process will import from a non-Postfix parent process, or
name=value environment overrides.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

18
postfix/html/postlog.1.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTLOG(1) POSTLOG(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postlog - Postfix-compatible logging utility
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postlog</b> [<b>-iv</b>] [<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>] [<b>-p</b> <i>priority</i>] [<b>-t</b> <i>tag</i>] [<i>text...</i>]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="postlog.1.html"><b>postlog</b>(1)</a> command implements a Postfix-compatible logging inter-
face for use in, for example, shell scripts.
@ -48,17 +48,17 @@ POSTLOG(1) POSTLOG(1)
<b>-v</b> Enable verbose logging for debugging purposes. Multiple <b>-v</b>
options make the software increasingly verbose.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="postlog.1.html"><b>postlog</b>(1)</a> command is designed to run with set-groupid privileges,
so that it can connect to the <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a> daemon process (Postfix 3.7
and later; earlier implementations of this command must not have
set-groupid or set-userid permissions).
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
MAIL_CONFIG
Directory with the <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> file.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this pro-
gram.
@ -97,15 +97,15 @@ POSTLOG(1) POSTLOG(1)
$<a href="postconf.5.html#maillog_file">maillog_file</a> is created for the first time, or when the file is
created after an existing file is rotated.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
The <a href="postlog.1.html"><b>postlog</b>(1)</a> command was introduced with Postfix version 3.4.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

18
postfix/html/postlogd.8.html
View File

@ -7,17 +7,17 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTLOGD(8) POSTLOGD(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postlogd - Postfix internal log server
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postlogd</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
This program logs events on behalf of Postfix programs when the maillog
configuration parameter specifies a non-empty value.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
Non-daemon Postfix programs don't know that they should log to the
internal logging service before they have processed command-line
options and <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> parameters. These programs still log earlier events
@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ POSTLOGD(8) POSTLOGD(8)
mission. Do not set this permission on programs other than <a href="postdrop.1.html"><b>postdrop</b>(1)</a>,
<a href="postqueue.1.html"><b>postqueue</b>(1)</a> and (Postfix &gt;= 3.7) <a href="postlog.1.html"><b>postlog</b>(1)</a>.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are not picked up automatically, because <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>
terminates only after reaching the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#max_idle">max_idle</a></b> time limit. Use the com-
mand "<b>postfix reload</b>" to speed up a change.
@ -75,19 +75,19 @@ POSTLOGD(8) POSTLOGD(8)
$<a href="postconf.5.html#maillog_file">maillog_file</a> is created for the first time, or when the file is
created after an existing file is rotated.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README_FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README_FILES</a></b>
Use "<b>postconf <a href="postconf.5.html#readme_directory">readme_directory</a></b>" or "<b>postconf <a href="postconf.5.html#html_directory">html_directory</a></b>" to locate
this information.
<a href="MAILLOG_README.html">MAILLOG_README</a>, Postfix logging to file or stdout
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
This service was introduced with Postfix version 3.4.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

22
postfix/html/postmap.1.html
View File

@ -7,14 +7,14 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTMAP(1) POSTMAP(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postmap - Postfix lookup table management
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap</b> [<b>-bfFhimnNoprsuUvw</b>] [<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>] [<b>-d</b> <i>key</i>] [<b>-q</b> <i>key</i>]
[<i>file</i><b>_</b><i>type</i>:]<i>file</i><b>_</b><i>name</i> ...
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="postmap.1.html"><b>postmap</b>(1)</a> command creates or queries one or more Postfix lookup
tables, or updates an existing one.
@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ POSTMAP(1) POSTMAP(1)
and an exclusive, advisory, lock is placed on the entire table, in
order to avoid surprises in spectator processes.
<b>INPUT FILE FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="input_file_format">INPUT FILE FORMAT</a></b>
The format of a lookup table input file is as follows:
<b>o</b> A table entry has the form
@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ POSTMAP(1) POSTMAP(1)
<a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp</a>: and <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>:. This resulted in loss of information with $<i>number</i>
substitutions.
<b>COMMAND-LINE ARGUMENTS</b>
<b><a name="command-line_arguments">COMMAND-LINE ARGUMENTS</a></b>
<b>-b</b> Enable message body query mode. When reading lookup keys from
standard input with "<b>-q -</b>", process the input as if it is an
email message in <a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5322">RFC 5322</a> format. Each line of body content
@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ POSTMAP(1) POSTMAP(1)
The name of the lookup table source file when rebuilding a data-
base.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems are logged to the standard error stream and to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or
<a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>. No output means that no problems were detected. Duplicate
entries are skipped and are flagged with a warning.
@ -244,14 +244,14 @@ POSTMAP(1) POSTMAP(1)
ing successful "<b>postmap -q</b>" lookup) and terminates with non-zero exit
status in case of failure.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
<b>MAIL_CONFIG</b>
Directory with Postfix configuration files.
<b>MAIL_VERBOSE</b>
Enable verbose logging for debugging purposes.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this pro-
gram. The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>post-</b></a>
<a href="postconf.5.html"><b>conf</b>(5)</a> for more details including examples.
@ -293,17 +293,17 @@ POSTMAP(1) POSTMAP(1)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#lmdb_map_size">lmdb_map_size</a> (16777216)</b>
The initial OpenLDAP LMDB database size limit in bytes.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postalias.1.html">postalias(1)</a>, create/update/query alias database
<a href="postconf.1.html">postconf(1)</a>, supported database types
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

26
postfix/html/postmulti.1.html
View File

@ -7,10 +7,10 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTMULTI(1) POSTMULTI(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postmulti - Postfix multi-instance manager
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>Enabling multi-instance management:</b>
<b>postmulti -e init</b> [<b>-v</b>]
@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ POSTMULTI(1) POSTMULTI(1)
<b>postmulti -e assign</b> [<b>-v</b>] <b>-i</b> <i>name</i> [<b>-I</b> <i>name</i>] [-G <i>group</i>]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="postmulti.1.html"><b>postmulti</b>(1)</a> command allows a Postfix administrator to manage mul-
tiple Postfix instances on a single host.
@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ POSTMULTI(1) POSTMULTI(1)
Each mode of operation has its own command syntax. For this reason,
each mode is documented in separate sections below.
<b>BACKGROUND</b>
<b><a name="background">BACKGROUND</a></b>
A multi-instance configuration consists of one primary Postfix
instance, and one or more secondary instances whose configuration
directory pathnames are recorded in the primary instance's <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>
@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ POSTMULTI(1) POSTMULTI(1)
See the <a href="MULTI_INSTANCE_README.html">MULTI_INSTANCE_README</a> tutorial for a more detailed discussion
of multi-instance management with <a href="postmulti.1.html"><b>postmulti</b>(1)</a>.
<b>ITERATOR MODE</b>
<b><a name="iterator_mode">ITERATOR MODE</a></b>
In iterator mode, <b>postmulti</b> performs the same operation on all Postfix
instances in turn.
@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ POSTMULTI(1) POSTMULTI(1)
<b>-v</b> Enable verbose logging for debugging purposes. Multiple <b>-v</b>
options make the software increasingly verbose.
<b>LIFE-CYCLE MANAGEMENT MODE</b>
<b><a name="life-cycle_management_mode">LIFE-CYCLE MANAGEMENT MODE</a></b>
With the <b>-e</b> option <a href="postmulti.1.html"><b>postmulti</b>(1)</a> can be used to add or delete a Postfix
instance, and to manage the multi-instance status of an existing
instance.
@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ POSTMULTI(1) POSTMULTI(1)
<b>-v</b> Enable verbose logging for debugging purposes. Multiple <b>-v</b>
options make the software increasingly verbose.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
The <a href="postmulti.1.html"><b>postmulti</b>(1)</a> command exports the following environment variables
before executing the requested <i>command</i> for a given instance:
@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ POSTMULTI(1) POSTMULTI(1)
<b>MAIL_CONFIG</b>
The location of the configuration directory of the instance.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -374,22 +374,22 @@ POSTMULTI(1) POSTMULTI(1)
(postfix-*.so) that have a relative pathname in the dynam-
icmaps.cf file.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
$<a href="postconf.5.html#meta_directory">meta_directory</a>/<a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>.proto, stock configuration file
$<a href="postconf.5.html#meta_directory">meta_directory</a>/<a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a>.proto, stock configuration file
$<a href="postconf.5.html#daemon_directory">daemon_directory</a>/postmulti-script, life-cycle helper program
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postfix.1.html">postfix(1)</a>, Postfix control program
<a href="postfix-wrapper.5.html">postfix-wrapper(5)</a>, Postfix multi-instance API
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="MULTI_INSTANCE_README.html">MULTI_INSTANCE_README</a>, Postfix multi-instance management
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
The <a href="postmulti.1.html"><b>postmulti</b>(1)</a> command was introduced with Postfix version 2.6.
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

28
postfix/html/postqueue.1.html
View File

@ -7,10 +7,10 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTQUEUE(1) POSTQUEUE(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postqueue - Postfix queue control
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>To flush the mail queue</b>:
<b>postqueue</b> [<b>-v</b>] [<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>] <b>-f</b>
@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ POSTQUEUE(1) POSTQUEUE(1)
<b>postqueue</b> [<b>-v</b>] [<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>] <b>-p</b>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="postqueue.1.html"><b>postqueue</b>(1)</a> command implements the Postfix user interface for
queue management. It implements operations that are traditionally
available via the <a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>sendmail</b>(1)</a> command. See the <a href="postsuper.1.html"><b>postsuper</b>(1)</a> command
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ POSTQUEUE(1) POSTQUEUE(1)
options make the software increasingly verbose. As of Postfix
2.3, this option is available for the super-user only.
<b>JSON OBJECT FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="json_object_format">JSON OBJECT FORMAT</a></b>
Each JSON object represents one queue file; it is emitted as a single
text line followed by a newline character.
@ -150,18 +150,18 @@ POSTQUEUE(1) POSTQUEUE(1)
delivery is in progress, or after the system was stopped
before it could record the reason.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
This program is designed to run with set-group ID privileges, so that
it can connect to Postfix daemon processes.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7159">RFC 7159</a> (JSON notation)
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>, and to the standard
error stream.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
MAIL_CONFIG
Directory with the <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> file. In order to avoid exploitation
of set-group ID privileges, a non-standard directory is allowed
@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ POSTQUEUE(1) POSTQUEUE(1)
<b>o</b> The command is invoked by the super-user.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this pro-
gram. The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>post-</b></a>
<a href="postconf.5.html"><b>conf</b>(5)</a> for more details including examples.
@ -221,10 +221,10 @@ POSTQUEUE(1) POSTQUEUE(1)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#authorized_mailq_users">authorized_mailq_users</a> (<a href="DATABASE_README.html#types">static</a>:anyone)</b>
List of users who are authorized to view the queue.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix, mail queue
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
<a href="showq.8.html">showq(8)</a>, list mail queue
<a href="flush.8.html">flush(8)</a>, fast flush service
@ -233,13 +233,13 @@ POSTQUEUE(1) POSTQUEUE(1)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="ETRN_README.html">ETRN_README</a>, Postfix ETRN howto
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
The postqueue command was introduced with Postfix version 1.1.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

46
postfix/html/postscreen.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postscreen - Postfix zombie blocker
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postscreen</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix <a href="postscreen.8.html"><b>postscreen</b>(8)</a> server provides additional protection against
mail server overload. One <a href="postscreen.8.html"><b>postscreen</b>(8)</a> process handles multiple
inbound SMTP connections, and decides which clients may talk to a Post-
@ -50,12 +50,12 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
is to keep spambots away from Postfix SMTP server processes, while min-
imizing overhead for legitimate traffic.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="postscreen.8.html"><b>postscreen</b>(8)</a> server is moderately security-sensitive. It talks to
untrusted clients on the network. The process can be run chrooted at
fixed low privilege.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc821">RFC 821</a> (SMTP protocol)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1123">RFC 1123</a> (Host requirements)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1652">RFC 1652</a> (8bit-MIME transport)
@ -71,10 +71,10 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3463">RFC 3463</a> (Enhanced Status Codes)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc5321">RFC 5321</a> (SMTP protocol, including multi-line 220 banners)
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
The <a href="postscreen.8.html"><b>postscreen</b>(8)</a> built-in SMTP protocol engine currently does not
announce support for AUTH, XCLIENT or XFORWARD. If you need to make
these services available on port 25, then do not enable the optional
@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
mail. See <a href="POSTSCREEN_README.html">POSTSCREEN_README</a>, section "Tests after the 220 SMTP server
greeting", for a discussion.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> are not picked up automatically, as <a href="postscreen.8.html"><b>postscreen</b>(8)</a>
processes may run for several hours. Use the command "postfix reload"
after a configuration change.
@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
Other parameters always evaluate as if the <b>stress</b> parameter value is
the empty string.
<b>COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="compatibility_controls">COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#postscreen_command_filter">postscreen_command_filter</a> ($<a href="postconf.5.html#smtpd_command_filter">smtpd_command_filter</a>)</b>
A mechanism to transform commands from remote SMTP clients.
@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#respectful_logging">respectful_logging</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
Avoid logging that implies white is better than black.
<b>TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="trouble_shooting_controls">TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#postscreen_expansion_filter">postscreen_expansion_filter</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
List of characters that are permitted in
<a href="postconf.5.html#postscreen_reject_footer">postscreen_reject_footer</a> attribute expansions.
@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
Safety net to keep mail queued that would otherwise be returned
to the sender.
<b>BEFORE-POSTSCREEN PROXY AGENT</b>
<b><a name="before-postscreen_proxy_agent">BEFORE-POSTSCREEN PROXY AGENT</a></b>
Available in Postfix version 2.10 and later:
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#postscreen_upstream_proxy_protocol">postscreen_upstream_proxy_protocol</a> (empty)</b>
@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#postscreen_blacklist_action">postscreen_blacklist_action</a> (ignore)</b>
Renamed to <a href="postconf.5.html#postscreen_denylist_action">postscreen_denylist_action</a> in Postfix 3.6.
<b>MAIL EXCHANGER POLICY TESTS</b>
<b><a name="mail_exchanger_policy_tests">MAIL EXCHANGER POLICY TESTS</a></b>
When <a href="postscreen.8.html"><b>postscreen</b>(8)</a> is configured to monitor all primary and backup MX
addresses, it can refuse to allowlist clients that connect to a backup
MX address only. For small sites, this requires configuring primary and
@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
non-allowlisted remote SMTP client can obtain <a href="postscreen.8.html"><b>postscreen</b>(8)</a>'s
temporary allowlist status.
<b>BEFORE 220 GREETING TESTS</b>
<b><a name="before_220_greeting_tests">BEFORE 220 GREETING TESTS</a></b>
These tests are executed before the remote SMTP client receives the
"220 servername" greeting. If no tests remain after the successful com-
pletion of this phase, the client will be handed off immediately to a
@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
greeting" protocol tests, based on its combined DNSBL score as
defined with the <a href="postconf.5.html#postscreen_dnsbl_sites">postscreen_dnsbl_sites</a> parameter.
<b>AFTER 220 GREETING TESTS</b>
<b><a name="after_220_greeting_tests">AFTER 220 GREETING TESTS</a></b>
These tests are executed after the remote SMTP client receives the "220
servername" greeting. If a client passes all tests during this phase,
it will receive a 4XX response to all RCPT TO commands. After the
@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
Enable "pipelining" SMTP protocol tests in the <a href="postscreen.8.html"><b>postscreen</b>(8)</a>
server.
<b>CACHE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="cache_controls">CACHE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#postscreen_cache_cleanup_interval">postscreen_cache_cleanup_interval</a> (12h)</b>
The amount of time between <a href="postscreen.8.html"><b>postscreen</b>(8)</a> cache cleanup runs.
@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
address passed a "pipelining" SMTP protocol test, before it is
required to pass that test again.
<b>RESOURCE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="resource_controls">RESOURCE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#line_length_limit">line_length_limit</a> (2048)</b>
Upon input, long lines are chopped up into pieces of at most
this length; upon delivery, long lines are reconstructed.
@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
remote SMTP client command or to perform a cache operation
before it is terminated by a built-in watchdog timer.
<b>STARTTLS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="starttls_controls">STARTTLS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#postscreen_tls_security_level">postscreen_tls_security_level</a> ($<a href="postconf.5.html#smtpd_tls_security_level">smtpd_tls_security_level</a>)</b>
The SMTP TLS security level for the <a href="postscreen.8.html"><b>postscreen</b>(8)</a> server; when a
non-empty value is specified, this overrides the obsolete param-
@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#tlsproxy_service_name">tlsproxy_service_name</a> (tlsproxy)</b>
The name of the <a href="tlsproxy.8.html"><b>tlsproxy</b>(8)</a> service entry in <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a>.
<b>OBSOLETE STARTTLS SUPPORT CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="obsolete_starttls_support_controls">OBSOLETE STARTTLS SUPPORT CONTROLS</a></b>
These parameters are supported for compatibility with <a href="smtpd.8.html"><b>smtpd</b>(8)</a> legacy
parameters.
@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
Mandatory TLS: announce STARTTLS support to remote SMTP clients,
and require that clients use TLS encryption.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -438,20 +438,20 @@ POSTSCREEN(8) POSTSCREEN(8)
The email address form that will be used in non-debug logging
(info, warning, etc.).
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="smtpd.8.html">smtpd(8)</a>, Postfix SMTP server
<a href="tlsproxy.8.html">tlsproxy(8)</a>, Postfix TLS proxy server
<a href="dnsblog.8.html">dnsblog(8)</a>, DNS allow/denylist logger
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="POSTSCREEN_README.html">POSTSCREEN_README</a>, Postfix Postscreen Howto
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
This service was introduced with Postfix version 2.8.
Many ideas in <a href="postscreen.8.html"><b>postscreen</b>(8)</a> were explored in earlier work by Michael

18
postfix/html/postsuper.1.html
View File

@ -7,17 +7,17 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTSUPER(1) POSTSUPER(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
postsuper - Postfix superintendent
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postsuper</b> [<b>-psSv</b>]
[<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>dir</i>] [<b>-d</b> <i>queue</i><b>_</b><i>id</i>]
[<b>-e</b> <i>queue</i><b>_</b><i>id</i>] [<b>-f</b> <i>queue</i><b>_</b><i>id</i>]
[<b>-h</b> <i>queue</i><b>_</b><i>id</i>] [<b>-H</b> <i>queue</i><b>_</b><i>id</i>]
[<b>-r</b> <i>queue</i><b>_</b><i>id</i>] [<i>directory ...</i>]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="postsuper.1.html"><b>postsuper</b>(1)</a> command does maintenance jobs on the Postfix queue.
Use of the command is restricted to the superuser. See the
<a href="postqueue.1.html"><b>postqueue</b>(1)</a> command for unprivileged queue operations such as listing
@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ POSTSUPER(1) POSTSUPER(1)
<b>-v</b> Enable verbose logging for debugging purposes. Multiple <b>-v</b>
options make the software increasingly verbose.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems are reported to the standard error stream and to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or
<a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
@ -249,15 +249,15 @@ POSTSUPER(1) POSTSUPER(1)
queue file name was fixed with <b>-s</b>. The report is written to the stan-
dard error stream and to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
MAIL_CONFIG
Directory with the <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> file.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
Mail that is not sanitized by Postfix (i.e. mail in the <b>maildrop</b> queue)
cannot be placed "on hold".
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this pro-
gram. The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>post-</b></a>
<a href="postconf.5.html"><b>conf</b>(5)</a> for more details including examples.
@ -294,13 +294,13 @@ POSTSUPER(1) POSTSUPER(1)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#enable_long_queue_ids">enable_long_queue_ids</a> (no)</b>
Enable long, non-repeating, queue IDs (queue file names).
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="sendmail.1.html">sendmail(1)</a>, Sendmail-compatible user interface
<a href="postqueue.1.html">postqueue(1)</a>, unprivileged queue operations
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

14
postfix/html/posttls-finger.1.html
View File

@ -7,14 +7,14 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
POSTTLS-FINGER(1) POSTTLS-FINGER(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
posttls-finger - Probe the TLS properties of an ESMTP or LMTP server.
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>posttls-finger</b> [<i>options</i>] [<b>inet:</b>]<i>domain</i>[:<i>port</i>] [<i>match ...</i>]
<b>posttls-finger</b> -S [<i>options</i>] <b>unix:</b><i>pathname</i> [<i>match ...</i>]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
<a href="posttls-finger.1.html"><b>posttls-finger</b>(1)</a> connects to the specified destination and reports
TLS-related information about the server. With SMTP, the destination is
a domainname; with LMTP it is either a domainname prefixed with <b>inet:</b>
@ -341,21 +341,21 @@ POSTTLS-FINGER(1) POSTTLS-FINGER(1)
is <b>dane</b>, or <b>dane-only</b> the match names are ignored, and <b>hostname,</b>
<b>nexthop</b> strategies are used.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
<b>MAIL_CONFIG</b>
Read configuration parameters from a non-default location.
<b>MAIL_VERBOSE</b>
Same as <b>-v</b> option.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="smtp-source.1.html">smtp-source(1)</a>, SMTP/LMTP message source
<a href="smtp-sink.1.html">smtp-sink(1)</a>, SMTP/LMTP message dump
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="TLS_README.html">TLS_README</a>, Postfix STARTTLS howto
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

24
postfix/html/proxymap.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
PROXYMAP(8) PROXYMAP(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
proxymap - Postfix lookup table proxy server
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>proxymap</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="proxymap.8.html"><b>proxymap</b>(8)</a> server provides read-only or read-write table lookup
service to Postfix processes. These services are implemented with dis-
tinct service names: <b>proxymap</b> and <b>proxywrite</b>, respectively. The purpose
@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ PROXYMAP(8) PROXYMAP(8)
client disconnects. The purpose is to share tables among multiple
client processes.
<b>SERVER PROCESS MANAGEMENT</b>
<b><a name="server_process_management">SERVER PROCESS MANAGEMENT</a></b>
<a href="proxymap.8.html"><b>proxymap</b>(8)</a> servers run under control by the Postfix <a href="master.8.html"><b>master</b>(8)</a> server.
Each server can handle multiple simultaneous connections. When all
servers are busy while a client connects, the <a href="master.8.html"><b>master</b>(8)</a> creates a new
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ PROXYMAP(8) PROXYMAP(8)
exceeded. Each server terminates after serving at least <b>$<a href="postconf.5.html#max_use">max_use</a></b>
clients or after <b>$<a href="postconf.5.html#max_idle">max_idle</a></b> seconds of idle time.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="proxymap.8.html"><b>proxymap</b>(8)</a> server opens only tables that are approved via the
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#proxy_read_maps">proxy_read_maps</a></b> or <b><a href="postconf.5.html#proxy_write_maps">proxy_write_maps</a></b> configuration parameters, does not
talk to users, and can run at fixed low privilege, chrooted or not.
@ -123,10 +123,10 @@ PROXYMAP(8) PROXYMAP(8)
where ownership of a file or directory does not match the provider of
its content.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
The <a href="proxymap.8.html"><b>proxymap</b>(8)</a> server provides service to multiple clients, and must
therefore not be used for tables that have high-latency lookups.
@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ PROXYMAP(8) PROXYMAP(8)
Tables that support "sync on update" should be safe (for example,
Berkeley DB) as should tables that are implemented by a real DBMS.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
On busy mail systems a long time may pass before <a href="proxymap.8.html"><b>proxymap</b>(8)</a> relevant
changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>" to
speed up a change.
@ -195,17 +195,17 @@ PROXYMAP(8) PROXYMAP(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#service_name">service_name</a> (read-only)</b>
The <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> service name of a Postfix daemon process.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="master.5.html">master(5)</a>, generic daemon options
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
The proxymap service was introduced with Postfix 2.0.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

48
postfix/html/qmgr.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
qmgr - Postfix queue manager
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>qmgr</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>qmgr</b>(8)</a> daemon awaits the arrival of incoming mail and arranges for
its delivery via Postfix delivery processes. The actual mail routing
strategy is delegated to the <a href="trivial-rewrite.8.html"><b>trivial-rewrite</b>(8)</a> daemon. This program
@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
carded. This stops potential loops caused by undeliverable bounce
notifications.
<b>MAIL QUEUES</b>
<b><a name="mail_queues">MAIL QUEUES</a></b>
The <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>qmgr</b>(8)</a> daemon maintains the following queues:
<b>incoming</b>
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
<b>hold</b> Messages that are kept "on hold" are kept here until someone
sets them free.
<b>DELIVERY STATUS REPORTS</b>
<b><a name="delivery_status_reports">DELIVERY STATUS REPORTS</a></b>
The <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>qmgr</b>(8)</a> daemon keeps an eye on per-message delivery status reports
in the following directories. Each status report file has the same name
as the corresponding message file:
@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
The <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>qmgr</b>(8)</a> daemon is responsible for asking the <a href="bounce.8.html"><b>bounce</b>(8)</a>, <a href="defer.8.html"><b>defer</b>(8)</a> or
<a href="trace.8.html"><b>trace</b>(8)</a> daemons to send delivery reports.
<b>STRATEGIES</b>
<b><a name="strategies">STRATEGIES</a></b>
The queue manager implements a variety of strategies for either opening
queue files (input) or for message delivery (output).
@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
delay while still preserving the correct per-message delays,
using a sophisticated preemptive message scheduling.
<b>TRIGGERS</b>
<b><a name="triggers">TRIGGERS</a></b>
On an idle system, the queue manager waits for the arrival of trigger
events, or it waits for a timer to go off. A trigger is a one-byte mes-
sage. Depending on the message received, the queue manager performs
@ -138,18 +138,18 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
<a href="QSHAPE_README.html#deferred_queue">deferred queue</a> run, one would request <b>A F D</b>; in order to notify the
queue manager of the arrival of new mail one would request <b>I</b>.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3463">RFC 3463</a> (Enhanced status codes)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3464">RFC 3464</a> (Delivery status notifications)
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>qmgr</b>(8)</a> daemon is not security sensitive. It reads single-character
messages from untrusted local users, and thus may be susceptible to
denial of service attacks. The <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>qmgr</b>(8)</a> daemon does not talk to the out-
side world, and it can be run at fixed low privilege in a chrooted
environment.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
Corrupted message files are saved to the <b>corrupt</b> queue for further
inspection.
@ -157,12 +157,12 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
Depending on the setting of the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#notify_classes">notify_classes</a></b> parameter, the postmas-
ter is notified of bounces and of other trouble.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
A single queue manager process has to compete for disk access with mul-
tiple front-end processes such as <a href="cleanup.8.html"><b>cleanup</b>(8)</a>. A sudden burst of inbound
mail can negatively impact outbound delivery rates.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are not picked up automatically as <a href="qmgr.8.html"><b>qmgr</b>(8)</a> is a per-
sistent process. Use the "<b>postfix reload</b>" command after a configuration
change.
@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
In the text below, <i>transport</i> is the first field in a <a href="master.5.html"><b>master.cf</b></a> entry.
<b>COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="compatibility_controls">COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</a></b>
Available before Postfix version 2.5:
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#allow_min_user">allow_min_user</a> (no)</b>
@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
next-hop destination, use $<a href="postconf.5.html#default_filter_nexthop">default_filter_nexthop</a> instead; when
that value is empty, use the domain in the recipient address.
<b><a href="QSHAPE_README.html#active_queue">ACTIVE QUEUE</a> CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="active_queue_controls">ACTIVE QUEUE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#qmgr_clog_warn_time">qmgr_clog_warn_time</a> (300s)</b>
The minimal delay between warnings that a specific destination
is clogging up the Postfix <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#active_queue">active queue</a>.
@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
<a href="postconf.5.html#default_recipient_refill_delay">ent_refill_delay</a> parameter value, where <i>transport</i> is the <a href="master.5.html">mas-
ter.cf</a> name of the message delivery transport.
<b>DELIVERY CONCURRENCY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="delivery_concurrency_controls">DELIVERY CONCURRENCY CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#initial_destination_concurrency">initial_destination_concurrency</a> (5)</b>
The initial per-destination concurrency level for parallel
delivery to the same destination.
@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
Make the queue manager's feedback algorithm verbose for perfor-
mance analysis purposes.
<b>RECIPIENT SCHEDULING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="recipient_scheduling_controls">RECIPIENT SCHEDULING CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#default_destination_recipient_limit">default_destination_recipient_limit</a> (50)</b>
The default maximal number of recipients per message delivery.
@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
<a href="postconf.5.html#default_destination_recipient_limit">ient_limit</a> parameter value, where <i>transport</i> is the <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a>
name of the message delivery transport.
<b>MESSAGE SCHEDULING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="message_scheduling_controls">MESSAGE SCHEDULING CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#default_delivery_slot_cost">default_delivery_slot_cost</a> (5)</b>
How often the Postfix queue manager's scheduler is allowed to
preempt delivery of one message with another.
@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
parameter value, where <i>transport</i> is the <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> name of the
message delivery transport.
<b>OTHER RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="other_resource_and_rate_controls">OTHER RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#minimal_backoff_time">minimal_backoff_time</a> (300s)</b>
The minimal time between attempts to deliver a deferred message;
prior to Postfix 2.4 the default value was 1000s.
@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
the parameter name is the <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> name of the message delivery
transport.
<b>SAFETY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="safety_controls">SAFETY CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#qmgr_daemon_timeout">qmgr_daemon_timeout</a> (1000s)</b>
How much time a Postfix queue manager process may take to handle
a request before it is terminated by a built-in watchdog timer.
@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
A safety limit that prevents address verification requests from
overwhelming the Postfix queue.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
The email address form that will be used in non-debug logging
(info, warning, etc.).
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix/incoming, <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#incoming_queue">incoming queue</a>
/var/spool/postfix/active, <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#active_queue">active queue</a>
/var/spool/postfix/deferred, <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#deferred_queue">deferred queue</a>
@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
/var/spool/postfix/defer, non-delivery status
/var/spool/postfix/trace, delivery status
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="trivial-rewrite.8.html">trivial-rewrite(8)</a>, address routing
<a href="bounce.8.html">bounce(8)</a>, delivery status reports
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
@ -482,11 +482,11 @@ QMGR(8) QMGR(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="SCHEDULER_README.html">SCHEDULER_README</a>, scheduling algorithm
<a href="QSHAPE_README.html">QSHAPE_README</a>, Postfix queue analysis
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

10
postfix/html/qmqp-sink.1.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
QMQP-SINK(1) QMQP-SINK(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
qmqp-sink - parallelized QMQP test server
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>qmqp-sink</b> [<b>-46cv</b>] [<b>-x</b> <i>time</i>] [<b>inet:</b>][<i>host</i>]:<i>port backlog</i>
<b>qmqp-sink</b> [<b>-46cv</b>] [<b>-x</b> <i>time</i>] <b>unix:</b><i>pathname backlog</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
<b>qmqp-sink</b> listens on the named host (or address) and port. It receives
messages from the network and throws them away. The purpose is to mea-
sure QMQP client performance, not protocol compliance. Connections can
@ -44,10 +44,10 @@ QMQP-SINK(1) QMQP-SINK(1)
Terminate after <i>time</i> seconds. This is to facilitate memory leak
testing.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="qmqp-source.1.html">qmqp-source(1)</a>, QMQP message generator
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

10
postfix/html/qmqp-source.1.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
QMQP-SOURCE(1) QMQP-SOURCE(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
qmqp-source - parallelized QMQP test generator
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>qmqp-source</b> [<i>options</i>] [<b>inet:</b>]<i>host</i>[:<i>port</i>]
<b>qmqp-source</b> [<i>options</i>] <b>unix:</b><i>pathname</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
<b>qmqp-source</b> connects to the named host and TCP port (default 628) and
sends one or more messages to it, either sequentially or in parallel.
The program speaks the QMQP protocol. Connections can be made to
@ -77,10 +77,10 @@ QMQP-SOURCE(1) QMQP-SOURCE(1)
Wait a fixed time between messages. Suspending one thread does
not affect other delivery threads.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="qmqp-sink.1.html">qmqp-sink(1)</a>, QMQP message dump
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

34
postfix/html/qmqpd.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
QMQPD(8) QMQPD(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
qmqpd - Postfix QMQP server
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>qmqpd</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix QMQP server receives one message per connection. Each mes-
sage is piped through the <a href="cleanup.8.html"><b>cleanup</b>(8)</a> daemon, and is placed into the
<a href="QSHAPE_README.html#incoming_queue"><b>incoming</b> queue</a> as one single queue file. The program expects to be run
@ -22,15 +22,15 @@ QMQPD(8) QMQPD(8)
The QMQP server implements one access policy: only explicitly autho-
rized client hosts are allowed to use the service.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The QMQP server is moderately security-sensitive. It talks to QMQP
clients and to DNS servers on the network. The QMQP server can be run
chrooted at fixed low privilege.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
The QMQP protocol provides only one server reply per message delivery.
It is therefore not possible to reject individual recipients.
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ QMQPD(8) QMQPD(8)
nent is longer than acceptable, Postfix replies immediately and closes
the connection. It is left up to the client to handle the situation.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automatically, as <a href="qmqpd.8.html"><b>qmqpd</b>(8)</a> processes
run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>"
to speed up a change.
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ QMQPD(8) QMQPD(8)
The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for
more details including examples.
<b>CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="content_inspection_controls">CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#content_filter">content_filter</a> (empty)</b>
After the message is queued, send the entire message to the
specified <i>transport:destination</i>.
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ QMQPD(8) QMQPD(8)
Enable or disable recipient validation, built-in content filter-
ing, or address mapping.
<b>SMTPUTF8 CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="smtputf8_controls">SMTPUTF8 CONTROLS</a></b>
Preliminary SMTPUTF8 support is introduced with Postfix 3.0.
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#smtputf8_enable">smtputf8_enable</a> (yes)</b>
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ QMQPD(8) QMQPD(8)
IDNA2008, when converting UTF-8 domain names to/from the ASCII
form that is used for DNS lookups.
<b>RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="resource_and_rate_controls">RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#line_length_limit">line_length_limit</a> (2048)</b>
Upon input, long lines are chopped up into pieces of at most
this length; upon delivery, long lines are reconstructed.
@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ QMQPD(8) QMQPD(8)
The time limit for sending or receiving information over the
network.
<b>TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="trouble_shooting_controls">TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#debug_peer_level">debug_peer_level</a> (2)</b>
The increment in verbose logging level when a nexthop destina-
tion, remote client or server name or network address matches a
@ -107,12 +107,12 @@ QMQPD(8) QMQPD(8)
Safety net to keep mail queued that would otherwise be returned
to the sender.
<b>TARPIT CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="tarpit_controls">TARPIT CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#qmqpd_error_delay">qmqpd_error_delay</a> (1s)</b>
How long the Postfix QMQP server will pause before sending a
negative reply to the remote QMQP client.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -168,20 +168,20 @@ QMQPD(8) QMQPD(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#service_name">service_name</a> (read-only)</b>
The <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> service name of a Postfix daemon process.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="http://cr.yp.to/proto/qmqp.html">http://cr.yp.to/proto/qmqp.html</a>, QMQP protocol
<a href="cleanup.8.html">cleanup(8)</a>, message canonicalization
<a href="master.8.html">master(8)</a>, process manager
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="QMQP_README.html">QMQP_README</a>, Postfix ezmlm-idx howto.
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
The qmqpd service was introduced with Postfix version 1.1.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

12
postfix/html/qshape.1.html
View File

@ -7,17 +7,17 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
QSHAPE(1) QSHAPE(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
qshape - Print Postfix queue domain and age distribution
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>qshape</b> [<b>-s</b>] [<b>-p</b>] [<b>-m</b> <i>min</i><b>_</b><i>subdomains</i>]
[<b>-b</b> <i>bucket</i><b>_</b><i>count</i>] [<b>-t</b> <i>bucket</i><b>_</b><i>time</i>]
[<b>-l</b>] [<b>-w</b> <i>terminal</i><b>_</b><i>width</i>]
[<b>-N</b> <i>batch</i><b>_</b><i>msg</i><b>_</b><i>count</i>] [<b>-n</b> <i>batch</i><b>_</b><i>top</i><b>_</b><i>domains</i>]
[<b>-c</b> <i>config</i><b>_</b><i>directory</i>] [<i>queue</i><b>_</b><i>name</i> ...]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <b>qshape</b> program helps the administrator understand the Postfix queue
message distribution in time and by sender domain or recipient domain.
The program needs read access to the queue directories and queue files,
@ -103,11 +103,11 @@ QSHAPE(1) QSHAPE(1)
tory even if you want the default <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#incoming_queue">incoming</a> and <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#active_queue">active queue</a> dis-
tribution.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="mailq.1.html">mailq(1)</a>, List all messages in the queue.
<a href="QSHAPE_README.html">QSHAPE_README</a> Examples and background material.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
$<a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a>/<a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a>, Postfix installation parameters.
$<a href="postconf.5.html#queue_directory">queue_directory</a>/maildrop/, local submission directory.
$<a href="postconf.5.html#queue_directory">queue_directory</a>/incoming/, new message queue.
@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ QSHAPE(1) QSHAPE(1)
$<a href="postconf.5.html#queue_directory">queue_directory</a>/active/, messages scheduled for delivery.
$<a href="postconf.5.html#queue_directory">queue_directory</a>/deferred/, messages postponed for later delivery.
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

26
postfix/html/regexp_table.5.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
REGEXP_TABLE(5) REGEXP_TABLE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
regexp_table - format of Postfix regular expression tables
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" <a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix mail system uses optional tables for address rewriting,
mail routing, or access control. These tables are usually in <b>dbm</b> or <b>db</b>
format.
@ -33,12 +33,12 @@ REGEXP_TABLE(5) REGEXP_TABLE(5)
terns, and "<b>postmap -bmq -</b> &lt;<i>file</i>" for <a href="header_checks.5.html">body_checks(5)</a> (Postfix 2.6 and
later).
<b>COMPATIBILITY</b>
<b><a name="compatibility">COMPATIBILITY</a></b>
With Postfix version 2.2 and earlier specify "<b>postmap -fq</b>" to query a
table that contains case sensitive patterns. Patterns are case insensi-
tive by default.
<b>TABLE FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="table_format">TABLE FORMAT</a></b>
The general form of a Postfix regular expression table is:
<b>/</b><i>pattern</i><b>/</b><i>flags result</i>
@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ REGEXP_TABLE(5) REGEXP_TABLE(5)
Toggles the extended expression syntax flag. By default, support
for extended expression syntax is enabled.
<b>TABLE SEARCH ORDER</b>
<b><a name="table_search_order">TABLE SEARCH ORDER</a></b>
Patterns are applied in the order as specified in the table, until a
pattern is found that matches the input string.
@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ REGEXP_TABLE(5) REGEXP_TABLE(5)
ken up into their <i>user</i> and <i>domain</i> constituent parts, nor is <i>user+foo</i>
broken up into <i>user</i> and <i>foo</i>.
<b>TEXT SUBSTITUTION</b>
<b><a name="text_substitution">TEXT SUBSTITUTION</a></b>
Substitution of substrings (text that matches patterns inside "()")
from the matched expression into the result string is requested with
$1, $2, etc.; specify $$ to produce a $ character as output. The
@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ REGEXP_TABLE(5) REGEXP_TABLE(5)
the expression does not match, substitutions are not available for
negated patterns.
<b>INLINE SPECIFICATION</b>
<b><a name="inline_specification">INLINE SPECIFICATION</a></b>
The contents of a table may be specified in the table name (Postfix 3.7
and later). The basic syntax is:
@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ REGEXP_TABLE(5) REGEXP_TABLE(5)
metacharacters such as '.' in the <i>$name</i> expansion. To prevent unex-
pected matches, use a <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>: table, and specify \Q<i>$name</i>\E.
<b>EXAMPLE SMTPD ACCESS MAP</b>
<b><a name="example_smtpd_access_map">EXAMPLE SMTPD ACCESS MAP</a></b>
# Disallow sender-specified routing. This is a must if you relay mail
# for other domains.
/[%!@].*[%!@]/ 550 Sender-specified routing rejected
@ -169,23 +169,23 @@ REGEXP_TABLE(5) REGEXP_TABLE(5)
/^(.*)-outgoing@(.*)$/ 550 Use ${1}@${2} instead
endif
<b>EXAMPLE HEADER FILTER MAP</b>
<b><a name="example_header_filter_map">EXAMPLE HEADER FILTER MAP</a></b>
# These were once common in junk mail.
/^Subject: make money fast/ REJECT
/^To: friend@public\.com/ REJECT
<b>EXAMPLE BODY FILTER MAP</b>
<b><a name="example_body_filter_map">EXAMPLE BODY FILTER MAP</a></b>
# First skip over base 64 encoded text to save CPU cycles.
~^[[:alnum:]+/]{60,}$~ OK
# Put your own body patterns here.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre_table(5)</a>, format of PCRE tables
<a href="cidr_table.5.html">cidr_table(5)</a>, format of CIDR tables
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

28
postfix/html/relocated.5.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
RELOCATED(5) RELOCATED(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
relocated - Postfix relocated table format
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap /etc/postfix/relocated</b>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The optional <a href="relocated.5.html"><b>relocated</b>(5)</a> table provides the information that is used
in "user has moved to <i>new</i><b>_</b><i>location</i>" bounce messages.
@ -34,13 +34,13 @@ RELOCATED(5) RELOCATED(5)
Table lookups are case insensitive.
<b>CASE FOLDING</b>
<b><a name="case_folding">CASE FOLDING</a></b>
The search string is folded to lowercase before database lookup. As of
Postfix 2.3, the search string is not case folded with database types
such as <a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp</a>: or <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>: whose lookup fields can match both upper and
lower case.
<b>TABLE FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="table_format">TABLE FORMAT</a></b>
The input format for the <a href="postmap.1.html"><b>postmap</b>(1)</a> command is as follows:
<b>o</b> An entry has one of the following form:
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ RELOCATED(5) RELOCATED(5)
<b>o</b> A logical line starts with non-whitespace text. A line that
starts with whitespace continues a logical line.
<b>TABLE SEARCH ORDER</b>
<b><a name="table_search_order">TABLE SEARCH ORDER</a></b>
With lookups from indexed files such as DB or DBM, or from networked
tables such as NIS, LDAP or SQL, patterns are tried in the order as
listed below:
@ -73,12 +73,12 @@ RELOCATED(5) RELOCATED(5)
Matches other addresses in <i>domain</i>. This form has the lowest
precedence.
<b>ADDRESS EXTENSION</b>
<b><a name="address_extension">ADDRESS EXTENSION</a></b>
When a mail address localpart contains the optional recipient delimiter
(e.g., <i>user+foo</i>@<i>domain</i>), the lookup order becomes: <i>user+foo</i>@<i>domain</i>,
<i>user</i>@<i>domain</i>, <i>user+foo</i>, <i>user</i>, and @<i>domain</i>.
<b>REGULAR EXPRESSION TABLES</b>
<b><a name="regular_expression_tables">REGULAR EXPRESSION TABLES</a></b>
This section describes how the table lookups change when the table is
given in the form of regular expressions or when lookups are directed
to a TCP-based server. For a description of regular expression lookup
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ RELOCATED(5) RELOCATED(5)
feature that parenthesized substrings from the pattern can be interpo-
lated as <b>$1</b>, <b>$2</b> and so on.
<b>TCP-BASED TABLES</b>
<b><a name="tcp-based_tables">TCP-BASED TABLES</a></b>
This section describes how the table lookups change when lookups are
directed to a TCP-based server. For a description of the TCP
client/server lookup protocol, see <a href="tcp_table.5.html"><b>tcp_table</b>(5)</a>. This feature is
@ -110,10 +110,10 @@ RELOCATED(5) RELOCATED(5)
Results are the same as with indexed file lookups.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
The table format does not understand quoting conventions.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant. The text
below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for more
details including examples.
@ -141,16 +141,16 @@ RELOCATED(5) RELOCATED(5)
receives mail on by way of a proxy or network address transla-
tion unit.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="trivial-rewrite.8.html">trivial-rewrite(8)</a>, address resolver
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<a href="ADDRESS_REWRITING_README.html">ADDRESS_REWRITING_README</a>, address rewriting guide
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

26
postfix/html/scache.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
SCACHE(8) SCACHE(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
scache - Postfix shared connection cache server
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>scache</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="scache.8.html"><b>scache</b>(8)</a> server maintains a shared multi-connection cache. This
information can be used by, for example, Postfix SMTP clients or other
Postfix delivery agents.
@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ SCACHE(8) SCACHE(8)
ties, and a cached file descriptor for the specified logical
destination.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="scache.8.html"><b>scache</b>(8)</a> server is not security-sensitive. It does not talk to the
network, and it does not talk to local users. The <a href="scache.8.html"><b>scache</b>(8)</a> server can
run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
@ -73,16 +73,16 @@ SCACHE(8) SCACHE(8)
The <a href="scache.8.html"><b>scache</b>(8)</a> server is not a trusted process. It must not be used to
store information that is security sensitive.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
The session cache cannot be shared among multiple machines.
When a connection expires from the cache, it is closed without the
appropriate protocol specific handshake.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automatically as <a href="scache.8.html"><b>scache</b>(8)</a> processes
run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>"
to speed up a change.
@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ SCACHE(8) SCACHE(8)
The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for
more details including examples.
<b>RESOURCE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="resource_controls">RESOURCE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#connection_cache_ttl_limit">connection_cache_ttl_limit</a> (2s)</b>
The maximal time-to-live value that the <a href="scache.8.html"><b>scache</b>(8)</a> connection
cache server allows.
@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ SCACHE(8) SCACHE(8)
connection cache hit and miss rates for logical destinations and
for physical endpoints.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -135,20 +135,20 @@ SCACHE(8) SCACHE(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#service_name">service_name</a> (read-only)</b>
The <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> service name of a Postfix daemon process.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="smtp.8.html">smtp(8)</a>, SMTP client
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="master.8.html">master(8)</a>, process manager
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="CONNECTION_CACHE_README.html">CONNECTION_CACHE_README</a>, Postfix connection cache
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
This service was introduced with Postfix version 2.2.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

36
postfix/html/sendmail.1.html
View File

@ -7,10 +7,10 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
sendmail - Postfix to Sendmail compatibility interface
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>sendmail</b> [<i>option ...</i>] [<i>recipient ...</i>]
<b>mailq</b>
@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<b>newaliases</b>
<b>sendmail -I</b>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix <a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>sendmail</b>(1)</a> command implements the Postfix to Sendmail com-
patibility interface. For the sake of compatibility with existing
applications, some Sendmail command-line options are recognized but
@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
Log mailer traffic. Use the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#debug_peer_list">debug_peer_list</a></b> and <b><a href="postconf.5.html#debug_peer_level">debug_peer_level</a></b>
configuration parameters instead.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
By design, this program is not set-user (or group) id. It is prepared
to handle message content from untrusted, possibly remote, users.
@ -318,11 +318,11 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>mail</b>(1)</a> command options, by specifying an email address that
starts with "<b>-</b>".
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>, and to the standard
error stream.
<b>ENVIRONMENT</b>
<b><a name="environment">ENVIRONMENT</a></b>
<b>MAIL_CONFIG</b>
Directory with Postfix configuration files.
@ -336,19 +336,19 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<b>NAME</b> The sender full name. This is used only with messages that have
no <b>From:</b> message header. See also the <b>-F</b> option above.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this pro-
gram. The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>post-</b></a>
<a href="postconf.5.html"><b>conf</b>(5)</a> for more details including examples.
<b>COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="compatibility_controls">COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</a></b>
Available with Postfix 2.9 and later:
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#sendmail_fix_line_endings">sendmail_fix_line_endings</a> (always)</b>
Controls how the Postfix sendmail command converts email message
line endings from &lt;CR&gt;&lt;LF&gt; into UNIX format (&lt;LF&gt;).
<b>TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="trouble_shooting_controls">TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</a></b>
The <a href="DEBUG_README.html">DEBUG_README</a> file gives examples of how to troubleshoot a Postfix
system.
@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
verbose logging level to increase by the amount specified in
$<a href="postconf.5.html#debug_peer_level">debug_peer_level</a>.
<b>ACCESS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="access_controls">ACCESS CONTROLS</a></b>
Available in Postfix version 2.2 and later:
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#authorized_flush_users">authorized_flush_users</a> (<a href="DATABASE_README.html#types">static</a>:anyone)</b>
@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>mail</b>(1)</a> command (and with the privileged <a href="postdrop.1.html"><b>postdrop</b>(1)</a> helper com-
mand).
<b>RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="resource_and_rate_controls">RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#bounce_size_limit">bounce_size_limit</a> (50000)</b>
The maximal amount of original message text that is sent in a
non-delivery notification.
@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
The time between <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#deferred_queue">deferred queue</a> scans by the queue manager;
prior to Postfix 2.4 the default value was 1000s.
<b>FAST FLUSH CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="fast_flush_controls">FAST FLUSH CONTROLS</a></b>
The <a href="ETRN_README.html">ETRN_README</a> file describes configuration and operation details for
the Postfix "fast flush" service.
@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
Optional list of destinations that are eligible for per-destina-
tion logfiles with mail that is queued to those destinations.
<b>VERP CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="verp_controls">VERP CONTROLS</a></b>
The <a href="VERP_README.html">VERP_README</a> file describes configuration and operation details of
Postfix support for variable envelope return path addresses.
@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
The characters Postfix accepts as VERP delimiter characters on
the Postfix <a href="sendmail.1.html"><b>sendmail</b>(1)</a> command line and in SMTP commands.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#alias_database">alias_database</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The alias databases for <a href="local.8.html"><b>local</b>(8)</a> delivery that are updated with
"<b>newaliases</b>" or with "<b>sendmail -bi</b>".
@ -483,11 +483,11 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
the default Postfix instance, and that are started, stopped,
etc., together with the default Postfix instance.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix, mail queue
/etc/postfix, configuration files
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="pickup.8.html">pickup(8)</a>, mail pickup daemon
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
<a href="smtpd.8.html">smtpd(8)</a>, SMTP server
@ -500,14 +500,14 @@ SENDMAIL(1) SENDMAIL(1)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README_FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README_FILES</a></b>
Use "<b>postconf <a href="postconf.5.html#readme_directory">readme_directory</a></b>" or "<b>postconf <a href="postconf.5.html#html_directory">html_directory</a></b>" to locate
this information.
<a href="DEBUG_README.html">DEBUG_README</a>, Postfix debugging howto
<a href="ETRN_README.html">ETRN_README</a>, Postfix ETRN howto
<a href="VERP_README.html">VERP_README</a>, Postfix VERP howto
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

20
postfix/html/showq.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
SHOWQ(8) SHOWQ(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
showq - list the Postfix mail queue
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>showq</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="showq.8.html"><b>showq</b>(8)</a> daemon reports the Postfix mail queue status. The output
is meant to be formatted by the <a href="postqueue.1.html">postqueue(1)</a> command, as it emulates
the Sendmail `mailq' command.
@ -22,19 +22,19 @@ SHOWQ(8) SHOWQ(8)
ruser. This mode of operation is used to emulate the `mailq' command
while the Postfix mail system is down.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="showq.8.html"><b>showq</b>(8)</a> daemon can run in a chroot jail at fixed low privilege,
and takes no input from the client. Its service port is accessible to
local untrusted users, so the service can be susceptible to denial of
service attacks.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
None. The <a href="showq.8.html"><b>showq</b>(8)</a> daemon does not interact with the outside world.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automatically as <a href="showq.8.html"><b>showq</b>(8)</a> processes
run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>"
to speed up a change.
@ -96,10 +96,10 @@ SHOWQ(8) SHOWQ(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#service_name">service_name</a> (read-only)</b>
The <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> service name of a Postfix daemon process.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix, queue directories
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="pickup.8.html">pickup(8)</a>, local mail pickup service
<a href="cleanup.8.html">cleanup(8)</a>, canonicalize and enqueue mail
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ SHOWQ(8) SHOWQ(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

12
postfix/html/smtp-sink.1.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
SMTP-SINK(1) SMTP-SINK(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
smtp-sink - parallelized SMTP/LMTP test server
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>smtp-sink</b> [<i>options</i>] [<b>inet:</b>][<i>host</i>]:<i>port backlog</i>
<b>smtp-sink</b> [<i>options</i>] <b>unix:</b><i>pathname backlog</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
<b>smtp-sink</b> listens on the named host (or address) and port. It takes
SMTP messages from the network and throws them away. The purpose is to
measure client performance, not protocol compliance.
@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ SMTP-SINK(1) SMTP-SINK(1)
The maximum length of the queue of pending connections, as
defined by the <b>listen</b>(2) system call.
<b>DUMP FILE FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="dump_file_format">DUMP FILE FORMAT</a></b>
Each dumped message contains a sequence of text lines, terminated with
the newline character. The sequence of information is as follows:
@ -272,10 +272,10 @@ SMTP-SINK(1) SMTP-SINK(1)
<i>time-stamp</i>
A time stamp as defined in <a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2822">RFC 2822</a>.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="smtp-source.1.html">smtp-source(1)</a>, SMTP/LMTP message generator
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

12
postfix/html/smtp-source.1.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
SMTP-SOURCE(1) SMTP-SOURCE(1)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
smtp-source - parallelized SMTP/LMTP test generator
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>smtp-source</b> [<i>options</i>] [<b>inet:</b>]<i>host</i>[:<i>port</i>]
<b>smtp-source</b> [<i>options</i>] <b>unix:</b><i>pathname</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
<b>smtp-source</b> connects to the named <i>host</i> and TCP <i>port</i> (default: port 25)
and sends one or more messages to it, either sequentially or in paral-
lel. The program speaks either SMTP (default) or LMTP. Connections can
@ -129,13 +129,13 @@ SMTP-SOURCE(1) SMTP-SOURCE(1)
<b>unix:</b><i>pathname</i>
Connect to the UNIX-domain socket at <i>pathname</i>.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
No SMTP command pipelining support.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="smtp-sink.1.html">smtp-sink(1)</a>, SMTP/LMTP message dump
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

50
postfix/html/smtp.8.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
smtp, lmtp - Postfix SMTP+LMTP client
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>smtp</b> [generic Postfix daemon options] [flags=DORX]
<b>lmtp</b> [generic Postfix daemon options] [flags=DORX]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix SMTP+LMTP client implements the SMTP and LMTP mail delivery
protocols. It processes message delivery requests from the queue man-
ager. Each request specifies a queue file, a sender address, a domain
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
that have a high volume of mail in the <a href="QSHAPE_README.html#active_queue">active queue</a>. Connection caching
can be enabled permanently for specific destinations.
<b>SMTP SERVER LOOKUP</b>
<b><a name="smtp_server_lookup">SMTP SERVER LOOKUP</a></b>
The Postfix SMTP client supports multiple destinations separated by
comma or whitespace (Postfix 3.5 and later). Each destination is tried
in the specified order.
@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
specified service (default: <b>smtp</b>). An IPv6 address must be for-
matted as [<b>ipv6</b>:<i>address</i>].
<b>LMTP SERVER LOOKUP</b>
<b><a name="lmtp_server_lookup">LMTP SERVER LOOKUP</a></b>
The Postfix LMTP client supports multiple destinations separated by
comma or whitespace (Postfix 3.5 and later). Each destination is tried
in the specified order.
@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
(default: <b>lmtp</b>). An IPv6 address must be formatted as
[<b>ipv6</b>:<i>address</i>].
<b>SINGLE-RECIPIENT DELIVERY</b>
<b><a name="single-recipient_delivery">SINGLE-RECIPIENT DELIVERY</a></b>
By default, the Postfix SMTP+LMTP client delivers mail to multiple
recipients per delivery request. This is undesirable when prepending a
<b>Delivered-to:</b> or <b>X-Original-To:</b> message header. To prevent Postfix from
@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
in the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> file, where <i>transport</i> is the name in the first
column of the Postfix <a href="master.5.html"><b>master.cf</b></a> entry for this mail delivery service.
<b>COMMAND ATTRIBUTE SYNTAX</b>
<b><a name="command_attribute_syntax">COMMAND ATTRIBUTE SYNTAX</a></b>
<b>flags=DORX</b> (optional)
Optional message processing flags.
@ -147,12 +147,12 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
This feature is available as of Postfix 3.5.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The SMTP+LMTP client is moderately security-sensitive. It talks to SMTP
or LMTP servers and to DNS servers on the network. The SMTP+LMTP client
can be run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc821">RFC 821</a> (SMTP protocol)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc822">RFC 822</a> (ARPA Internet Text Messages)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1651">RFC 1651</a> (SMTP service extensions)
@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6533">RFC 6533</a> (Internationalized Delivery Status Notifications)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7672">RFC 7672</a> (SMTP security via opportunistic DANE TLS)
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
Corrupted message files are marked so that the queue manager can move
them to the <b>corrupt</b> queue for further inspection.
@ -183,14 +183,14 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
Depending on the setting of the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#notify_classes">notify_classes</a></b> parameter, the postmas-
ter is notified of bounces, protocol problems, and of other trouble.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
SMTP and LMTP connection reuse for TLS (without closing the SMTP or
LMTP connection) is not supported before Postfix 3.4.
SMTP and LMTP connection reuse assumes that SASL credentials are valid
for all destinations that map onto the same IP address and TCP port.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Postfix versions 2.3 and later implement the SMTP and LMTP client with
the same program, and choose the protocol and configuration parameters
based on the process name, <b>smtp</b> or <b>lmtp</b>.
@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for
more details including examples.
<b>COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="compatibility_controls">COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#ignore_mx_lookup_error">ignore_mx_lookup_error</a> (no)</b>
Ignore DNS MX lookups that produce no response.
@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
to MX or IP address lookup as if SRV record lookup was not
enabled.
<b>MIME PROCESSING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="mime_processing_controls">MIME PROCESSING CONTROLS</a></b>
Available in Postfix version 2.0 and later:
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#disable_mime_output_conversion">disable_mime_output_conversion</a> (no)</b>
@ -434,14 +434,14 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#mime_nesting_limit">mime_nesting_limit</a> (100)</b>
The maximal recursion level that the MIME processor will handle.
<b>EXTERNAL CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="external_content_inspection_controls">EXTERNAL CONTENT INSPECTION CONTROLS</a></b>
Available in Postfix version 2.1 and later:
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#smtp_send_xforward_command">smtp_send_xforward_command</a> (no)</b>
Send the non-standard XFORWARD command when the Postfix SMTP
server EHLO response announces XFORWARD support.
<b>SASL AUTHENTICATION CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="sasl_authentication_controls">SASL AUTHENTICATION CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#smtp_sasl_auth_enable">smtp_sasl_auth_enable</a> (no)</b>
Enable SASL authentication in the Postfix SMTP client.
@ -506,7 +506,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
The delimiter between username and password in sasl_passwd_maps
lookup results.
<b>STARTTLS SUPPORT CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="starttls_support_controls">STARTTLS SUPPORT CONTROLS</a></b>
Detailed information about STARTTLS configuration may be found in the
<a href="TLS_README.html">TLS_README</a> document.
@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
reuse a previously-negotiated TLS session (there is no new
information to report).
<b>OBSOLETE STARTTLS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="obsolete_starttls_controls">OBSOLETE STARTTLS CONTROLS</a></b>
The following configuration parameters exist for compatibility with
Postfix versions before 2.3. Support for these will be removed in a
future release.
@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
Obsolete Postfix &lt; 2.3 control for the Postfix SMTP client TLS
cipher list.
<b>RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="resource_and_rate_controls">RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#smtp_connect_timeout">smtp_connect_timeout</a> (30s)</b>
The Postfix SMTP client time limit for completing a TCP connec-
tion, or zero (use the operating system built-in time limit).
@ -921,7 +921,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
<a href="postconf.5.html#default_destination_recipient_limit">ient_limit</a> parameter value, where <i>transport</i> is the <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a>
name of the message delivery transport.
<b>SMTPUTF8 CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="smtputf8_controls">SMTPUTF8 CONTROLS</a></b>
Preliminary SMTPUTF8 support is introduced with Postfix 3.0.
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#smtputf8_enable">smtputf8_enable</a> (yes)</b>
@ -939,7 +939,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
IDNA2008, when converting UTF-8 domain names to/from the ASCII
form that is used for DNS lookups.
<b>TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="trouble_shooting_controls">TROUBLE SHOOTING CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#debug_peer_level">debug_peer_level</a> (2)</b>
The increment in verbose logging level when a nexthop destina-
tion, remote client or server name or network address matches a
@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#notify_classes">notify_classes</a> (resource, software)</b>
The list of error classes that are reported to the postmaster.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#best_mx_transport">best_mx_transport</a> (empty)</b>
Where the Postfix SMTP client should deliver mail when it
detects a "mail loops back to myself" error condition.
@ -1097,7 +1097,7 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
Defer delivery when the Postfix SMTP client cannot apply the
<a href="postconf.5.html#smtp_bind_address">smtp_bind_address</a> or <a href="postconf.5.html#smtp_bind_address6">smtp_bind_address6</a> setting.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="generic.5.html">generic(5)</a>, output address rewriting
<a href="header_checks.5.html">header_checks(5)</a>, message header content inspection
<a href="header_checks.5.html">body_checks(5)</a>, body parts content inspection
@ -1111,11 +1111,11 @@ SMTP,(LMTP) SMTP,(LMTP)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="SASL_README.html">SASL_README</a>, Postfix SASL howto
<a href="TLS_README.html">TLS_README</a>, Postfix STARTTLS howto
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

24
postfix/html/socketmap_table.5.html
View File

@ -7,17 +7,17 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
SOCKETMAP_TABLE(5) SOCKETMAP_TABLE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
socketmap_table - Postfix socketmap table lookup client
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" <a href="socketmap_table.html">socketmap</a>:inet:</b><i>host</i><b>:</b><i>port</i><b>:</b><i>name</i>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" <a href="socketmap_table.html">socketmap</a>:unix:</b><i>pathname</i><b>:</b><i>name</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="socketmap_table.html">socketmap</a>:inet:</b><i>host</i><b>:</b><i>port</i><b>:</b><i>name</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="socketmap_table.html">socketmap</a>:unix:</b><i>pathname</i><b>:</b><i>name</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix mail system uses optional tables for address rewriting,
mail routing or policy lookup.
@ -26,12 +26,12 @@ SOCKETMAP_TABLE(5) SOCKETMAP_TABLE(5)
<i>name</i><b>:</b><i>name</i>. In both cases, <i>name</i> specifies the name field in a socketmap
client request (see "REQUEST FORMAT" below).
<b>PROTOCOL</b>
<b><a name="protocol">PROTOCOL</a></b>
Socketmaps use a simple protocol: the client sends one request, and the
server sends one reply. Each request and each reply are sent as one
netstring object.
<b>REQUEST FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="request_format">REQUEST FORMAT</a></b>
The socketmap protocol supports only the lookup request. The request
has the following form:
@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ SOCKETMAP_TABLE(5) SOCKETMAP_TABLE(5)
address extension or domain portion. This behavior is also found with
<a href="cidr_table.5.html">cidr</a>:, <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>:, and <a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp</a>: tables.
<b>REPLY FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="reply_format">REPLY FORMAT</a></b>
The Postfix socketmap client requires that replies are not longer than
100000 characters (not including the netstring encapsulation). Replies
must have the following form:
@ -63,11 +63,11 @@ SOCKETMAP_TABLE(5) SOCKETMAP_TABLE(5)
The request failed. The reason, if non-empty, is descriptive
text.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
This map cannot be used for security-sensitive information,
because neither the connection nor the server are authenticated.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="http://cr.yp.to/proto/netstrings.txt">http://cr.yp.to/proto/netstrings.txt</a>, netstring definition
<a href="postconf.1.html">postconf(1)</a>, Postfix supported lookup tables
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
@ -75,16 +75,16 @@ SOCKETMAP_TABLE(5) SOCKETMAP_TABLE(5)
<a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre_table(5)</a>, format of PCRE tables
<a href="cidr_table.5.html">cidr_table(5)</a>, format of CIDR tables
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
The protocol limits are not yet configurable.
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
Socketmap support was introduced with Postfix version 2.10.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

24
postfix/html/spawn.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
SPAWN(8) SPAWN(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
spawn - Postfix external command spawner
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>spawn</b> [generic Postfix daemon options] command_attributes...
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="spawn.8.html"><b>spawn</b>(8)</a> daemon provides the Postfix equivalent of <b>inetd</b>. It lis-
tens on a port as specified in the Postfix <a href="master.5.html"><b>master.cf</b></a> file and spawns an
external command whenever a connection is established. The connection
@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ SPAWN(8) SPAWN(8)
This daemon expects to be run from the <a href="master.8.html"><b>master</b>(8)</a> process manager.
<b>COMMAND ATTRIBUTE SYNTAX</b>
<b><a name="command_attribute_syntax">COMMAND ATTRIBUTE SYNTAX</a></b>
The external command attributes are given in the <a href="master.5.html"><b>master.cf</b></a> file at the
end of a service definition. The syntax is as follows:
@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ SPAWN(8) SPAWN(8)
out interpretation of shell meta characters by a shell command
interpreter.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
In order to enforce standard Postfix process resource controls, each
<a href="spawn.8.html"><b>spawn</b>(8)</a> daemon process runs only one external command, and blocks
until the command terminates or a time limit is reached. As such, it
@ -51,17 +51,17 @@ SPAWN(8) SPAWN(8)
The <a href="spawn.8.html"><b>spawn</b>(8)</a> daemon is expected to be replaced by a more structural
solution.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
The <a href="spawn.8.html"><b>spawn</b>(8)</a> daemon reports abnormal child exits. Problems are logged
to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
This program needs root privilege in order to execute external commands
as the specified user. It is therefore security sensitive. However the
<a href="spawn.8.html"><b>spawn</b>(8)</a> daemon does not talk to the external command and thus is not
vulnerable to data-driven attacks.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automatically as <a href="spawn.8.html"><b>spawn</b>(8)</a> processes
run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>"
to speed up a change.
@ -72,13 +72,13 @@ SPAWN(8) SPAWN(8)
In the text below, <i>transport</i> is the first field of the entry in the
<a href="master.5.html"><b>master.cf</b></a> file.
<b>RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROL</b>
<b><a name="resource_and_rate_control">RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROL</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#transport_time_limit">transport_time_limit</a> ($<a href="postconf.5.html#command_time_limit">command_time_limit</a>)</b>
A transport-specific override for the <a href="postconf.5.html#command_time_limit">command_time_limit</a> parame-
ter value, where <i>transport</i> is the <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> name of the message
delivery transport.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous">MISCELLANEOUS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -128,13 +128,13 @@ SPAWN(8) SPAWN(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#service_name">service_name</a> (read-only)</b>
The <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> service name of a Postfix daemon process.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="master.8.html">master(8)</a>, process manager
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

20
postfix/html/sqlite_table.5.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
SQLITE_TABLE(5) SQLITE_TABLE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
sqlite_table - Postfix SQLite configuration
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" <a href="sqlite_table.5.html">sqlite</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="sqlite_table.5.html">sqlite</a>:/etc/postfix/</b><i>filename</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix mail system uses optional tables for address rewriting or
mail routing. These tables are usually in <b>dbm</b> or <b>db</b> format.
@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ SQLITE_TABLE(5) SQLITE_TABLE(5)
The file /etc/postfix/sqlite-aliases.cf has the same format as the
Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> file, and can specify the parameters described below.
<b>LIST MEMBERSHIP</b>
<b><a name="list_membership">LIST MEMBERSHIP</a></b>
When using SQL to store lists such as $<a href="postconf.5.html#mynetworks">mynetworks</a>, $<a href="postconf.5.html#mydestination">mydestination</a>,
$<a href="postconf.5.html#relay_domains">relay_domains</a>, $<a href="postconf.5.html#local_recipient_maps">local_recipient_maps</a>, etc., it is important to under-
stand that the table must store each list member as a separate key. The
@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ SQLITE_TABLE(5) SQLITE_TABLE(5)
value. With SQL databases it is not uncommon to return the key itself
or a constant value.
<b>SQLITE PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="sqlite_parameters">SQLITE PARAMETERS</a></b>
<b>dbpath</b> The SQLite database file location. Example:
dbpath = customer_database
@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ SQLITE_TABLE(5) SQLITE_TABLE(5)
example, if the map is specified as "<a href="sqlite_table.5.html">sqlite</a>:<i>sqlitename</i>", the parameter
"query" would be defined in <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> as "<i>sqlitename</i>_query".
<b>OBSOLETE QUERY INTERFACE</b>
<b><a name="obsolete_query_interface">OBSOLETE QUERY INTERFACE</a></b>
This section describes an interface that is deprecated as of Postfix
2.2. It is replaced by the more general <b>query</b> interface described
above. If the <b>query</b> parameter is defined, the legacy parameters
@ -214,21 +214,21 @@ SQLITE_TABLE(5) SQLITE_TABLE(5)
Additional conditions to the SQL query. Example:
<b>additional_conditions</b> = AND status = 'paid'
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table maintenance
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="ldap_table.5.html">ldap_table(5)</a>, LDAP lookup tables
<a href="mysql_table.5.html">mysql_table(5)</a>, MySQL lookup tables
<a href="pgsql_table.5.html">pgsql_table(5)</a>, PostgreSQL lookup tables
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<a href="SQLITE_README.html">SQLITE_README</a>, Postfix SQLITE howto
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
SQLite support was introduced with Postfix version 2.8.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

24
postfix/html/tcp_table.5.html
View File

@ -7,15 +7,15 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
TCP_TABLE(5) TCP_TABLE(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
tcp_table - Postfix client/server table lookup protocol
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" <a href="tcp_table.5.html">tcp</a>:</b><i>host:port</i>
<b>postmap -q - <a href="tcp_table.5.html">tcp</a>:</b><i>host:port</i> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The Postfix mail system uses optional tables for address rewriting or
mail routing. These tables are usually in <b>dbm</b> or <b>db</b> format. Alterna-
tively, table lookups can be directed to a TCP server.
@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ TCP_TABLE(5) TCP_TABLE(5)
To test lookup tables, use the "<b>postmap -q</b>" command as described in the
SYNOPSIS above.
<b>PROTOCOL DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="protocol_description">PROTOCOL DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The TCP map class implements a very simple protocol: the client sends a
request, and the server sends one reply. Requests and replies are sent
as one line of ASCII text, terminated by the ASCII newline character.
@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ TCP_TABLE(5) TCP_TABLE(5)
Send and receive operations must complete in 100 seconds.
<b>REQUEST FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="request_format">REQUEST FORMAT</a></b>
The tcp_table protocol supports only the lookup request. The request
has the following form:
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ TCP_TABLE(5) TCP_TABLE(5)
address extension or domain portion. This behavior is also found with
<a href="cidr_table.5.html">cidr</a>:, <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>:, and <a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp</a>: tables.
<b>REPLY FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="reply_format">REPLY FORMAT</a></b>
Each reply specifies a status code and text. Replies must be no longer
than 4096 characters including the newline terminator.
@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ TCP_TABLE(5) TCP_TABLE(5)
The request was successful. In the case of a lookup request, the
text contains an encoded version of the requested data.
<b>ENCODING</b>
<b><a name="encoding">ENCODING</a></b>
In request and reply parameters, the character %, each non-printing
character, and each whitespace character must be replaced by %XX, where
XX is the corresponding ASCII hexadecimal character value. The hexadec-
@ -73,27 +73,27 @@ TCP_TABLE(5) TCP_TABLE(5)
encoding as long as the reply is guaranteed to not contain the % or
NEWLINE character.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
Do not use TCP lookup tables for security critical purposes. The
client-server connection is not protected and the server is not authen-
ticated.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
Only the lookup method is currently implemented.
The client does not hang up when the connection is idle for a long
time.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp_table(5)</a>, format of regular expression tables
<a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre_table(5)</a>, format of PCRE tables
<a href="cidr_table.5.html">cidr_table(5)</a>, format of CIDR tables
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

28
postfix/html/tlsmgr.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
TLSMGR(8) TLSMGR(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
tlsmgr - Postfix TLS session cache and PRNG manager
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>tlsmgr</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="tlsmgr.8.html"><b>tlsmgr</b>(8)</a> manages the Postfix TLS session caches. It stores and
retrieves cache entries on request by <a href="smtpd.8.html"><b>smtpd</b>(8)</a> and <a href="smtp.8.html"><b>smtp</b>(8)</a> processes,
and periodically removes entries that have expired.
@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ TLSMGR(8) TLSMGR(8)
when the process terminates, and reads the exchange file when initial-
izing its PRNG.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="tlsmgr.8.html"><b>tlsmgr</b>(8)</a> is not security-sensitive. The code that maintains the
external and internal PRNG pools does not "trust" the data that it
manipulates, and the code that maintains the TLS session cache does not
@ -50,14 +50,14 @@ TLSMGR(8) TLSMGR(8)
to open a cache file under a non-Postfix directory is redirected to the
Postfix-owned <b><a href="postconf.5.html#data_directory">data_directory</a></b>, and a warning is logged.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
There is no automatic means to limit the number of entries in the TLS
session caches and/or the size of the TLS cache files.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are not picked up automatically, because <a href="tlsmgr.8.html"><b>tlsmgr</b>(8)</a>
is a persistent processes. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>" after a
configuration change.
@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ TLSMGR(8) TLSMGR(8)
The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for
more details including examples.
<b>TLS SESSION CACHE</b>
<b><a name="tls_session_cache">TLS SESSION CACHE</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#lmtp_tls_loglevel">lmtp_tls_loglevel</a> (0)</b>
The LMTP-specific version of the <a href="postconf.5.html#smtp_tls_loglevel">smtp_tls_loglevel</a> configuration
parameter.
@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ TLSMGR(8) TLSMGR(8)
The expiration time of Postfix SMTP server TLS session cache
information.
<b>PSEUDO RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR</b>
<b><a name="pseudo_random_number_generator">PSEUDO RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#tls_random_source">tls_random_source</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The external entropy source for the in-memory <a href="tlsmgr.8.html"><b>tlsmgr</b>(8)</a> pseudo
random number generator (PRNG) pool.
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ TLSMGR(8) TLSMGR(8)
in-memory pseudo random number generator (PRNG) pool from exter-
nal sources.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ TLSMGR(8) TLSMGR(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#service_name">service_name</a> (read-only)</b>
The <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> service name of a Postfix daemon process.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="smtp.8.html">smtp(8)</a>, Postfix SMTP client
<a href="smtpd.8.html">smtpd(8)</a>, Postfix SMTP server
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
@ -164,13 +164,13 @@ TLSMGR(8) TLSMGR(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="TLS_README.html">TLS_README</a>, Postfix TLS configuration and operation
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
This service was introduced with Postfix version 2.2.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

18
postfix/html/trace.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
bounce - Postfix delivery status reports
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>bounce</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="bounce.8.html"><b>bounce</b>(8)</a> daemon maintains per-message log files with delivery sta-
tus information. Each log file is named after the queue file that it
corresponds to, and is kept in a queue subdirectory named after the
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
This is used by clients that cannot retry transactions by themselves,
and that depend on retry logic in their own client.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc822">RFC 822</a> (ARPA Internet Text Messages)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2045">RFC 2045</a> (Format of Internet Message Bodies)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2822">RFC 2822</a> (Internet Message Format)
@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6532">RFC 6532</a> (Internationalized Message Format)
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6533">RFC 6533</a> (Internationalized Delivery Status Notifications)
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automatically, as <a href="bounce.8.html"><b>bounce</b>(8)</a> processes
run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>"
to speed up a change.
@ -166,12 +166,12 @@ BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#header_from_format">header_from_format</a> (standard)</b>
The format of the Postfix-generated <b>From:</b> header.
<b>FILES</b>
<b><a name="files">FILES</a></b>
/var/spool/postfix/bounce/* non-delivery records
/var/spool/postfix/defer/* non-delivery records
/var/spool/postfix/trace/* delivery status records
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="bounce.5.html">bounce(5)</a>, bounce message template format
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ BOUNCE(8) BOUNCE(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

28
postfix/html/transport.5.html
View File

@ -7,17 +7,17 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
TRANSPORT(5) TRANSPORT(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
transport - Postfix transport table format
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap /etc/postfix/transport</b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" /etc/postfix/transport</b>
<b>postmap -q - /etc/postfix/transport</b> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The optional <a href="transport.5.html"><b>transport</b>(5)</a> table specifies a mapping from email
addresses to message delivery transports and next-hop destinations.
Message delivery transports such as <b>local</b> or <b>smtp</b> are defined in the
@ -66,13 +66,13 @@ TRANSPORT(5) TRANSPORT(5)
a slightly different way as described below under "REGULAR EXPRESSION
TABLES" or "TCP-BASED TABLES".
<b>CASE FOLDING</b>
<b><a name="case_folding">CASE FOLDING</a></b>
The search string is folded to lowercase before database lookup. As of
Postfix 2.3, the search string is not case folded with database types
such as <a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp</a>: or <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>: whose lookup fields can match both upper and
lower case.
<b>TABLE FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="table_format">TABLE FORMAT</a></b>
The input format for the <a href="postmap.1.html"><b>postmap</b>(1)</a> command is as follows:
<i>pattern result</i>
@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ TRANSPORT(5) TRANSPORT(5)
The <i>result</i> is of the form <i>transport:nexthop</i> and specifies how or where
to deliver mail. This is described in section "RESULT FORMAT".
<b>TABLE SEARCH ORDER</b>
<b><a name="table_search_order">TABLE SEARCH ORDER</a></b>
With lookups from indexed files such as DB or DBM, or from networked
tables such as NIS, LDAP or SQL, patterns are tried in the order as
listed below:
@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ TRANSPORT(5) TRANSPORT(5)
Note 2: <i>user@domain</i> or <i>user+extension@domain</i> lookup is available in
Postfix 2.0 and later.
<b>RESULT FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="result_format">RESULT FORMAT</a></b>
The lookup result is of the form <i>transport</i><b>:</b><i>nexthop</i>. The <i>transport</i>
field specifies a mail delivery transport such as <b>smtp</b> or <b>local</b>. The
<i>nexthop</i> field specifies where and how to deliver mail.
@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ TRANSPORT(5) TRANSPORT(5)
A null <i>transport</i> field with non-null <i>nexthop</i> field does not modify the
transport information.
<b>EXAMPLES</b>
<b><a name="examples">EXAMPLES</a></b>
In order to deliver internal mail directly, while using a mail relay
for all other mail, specify a null entry for internal destinations (do
not change the delivery transport or the nexthop information) and spec-
@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ TRANSPORT(5) TRANSPORT(5)
This causes all mail for <i>user</i>@<i>anything</i><b>.example.com</b> to be bounced.
<b>REGULAR EXPRESSION TABLES</b>
<b><a name="regular_expression_tables">REGULAR EXPRESSION TABLES</a></b>
This section describes how the table lookups change when the table is
given in the form of regular expressions. For a description of regular
expression lookup table syntax, see <a href="regexp_table.5.html"><b>regexp_table</b>(5)</a> or <a href="pcre_table.5.html"><b>pcre_table</b>(5)</a>.
@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ TRANSPORT(5) TRANSPORT(5)
of $1 etc. in regular expression lookup tables, because that could open
a security hole (Postfix version 2.3 and later).
<b>TCP-BASED TABLES</b>
<b><a name="tcp-based_tables">TCP-BASED TABLES</a></b>
This section describes how the table lookups change when lookups are
directed to a TCP-based server. For a description of the TCP
client/server lookup protocol, see <a href="tcp_table.5.html"><b>tcp_table</b>(5)</a>. This feature is not
@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ TRANSPORT(5) TRANSPORT(5)
Results are the same as with indexed file lookups.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant. The text
below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for more
details including examples.
@ -259,18 +259,18 @@ TRANSPORT(5) TRANSPORT(5)
Optional lookup tables with mappings from recipient address to
(message delivery transport, next-hop destination).
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="trivial-rewrite.8.html">trivial-rewrite(8)</a>, rewrite and resolve addresses
<a href="master.5.html">master(5)</a>, <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> file format
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="ADDRESS_REWRITING_README.html">ADDRESS_REWRITING_README</a>, address rewriting guide
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<a href="FILTER_README.html">FILTER_README</a>, external content filter
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

32
postfix/html/trivial-rewrite.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8) TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
trivial-rewrite - Postfix address rewriting and resolving daemon
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>trivial-rewrite</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="trivial-rewrite.8.html"><b>trivial-rewrite</b>(8)</a> daemon processes three types of client service
requests:
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8) TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8)
<b>verify</b> <i>sender address</i>
Resolve the address for address verification purposes.
<b>SERVER PROCESS MANAGEMENT</b>
<b><a name="server_process_management">SERVER PROCESS MANAGEMENT</a></b>
The <a href="trivial-rewrite.8.html"><b>trivial-rewrite</b>(8)</a> servers run under control by the Postfix <a href="master.8.html">mas-</a>
<a href="master.8.html">ter(8)</a> server. Each server can handle multiple simultaneous connec-
tions. When all servers are busy while a client connects, the master
@ -65,18 +65,18 @@ TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8) TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8)
after serving at least <b>$<a href="postconf.5.html#max_use">max_use</a></b> clients of after <b>$<a href="postconf.5.html#max_idle">max_idle</a></b> seconds of
idle time.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
None. The command does not interact with the outside world.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="trivial-rewrite.8.html"><b>trivial-rewrite</b>(8)</a> daemon is not security sensitive. By default,
this daemon does not talk to remote or local users. It can run at a
fixed low privilege in a chrooted environment.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
On busy mail systems a long time may pass before a <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> change
affecting <a href="trivial-rewrite.8.html"><b>trivial-rewrite</b>(8)</a> is picked up. Use the command "<b>postfix</b>
<b>reload</b>" to speed up a change.
@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8) TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8)
The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for
more details including examples.
<b>COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="compatibility_controls">COMPATIBILITY CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#resolve_dequoted_address">resolve_dequoted_address</a> (yes)</b>
Resolve a recipient address safely instead of correctly, by
looking inside quotes.
@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8) TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8)
Allow a sender or recipient address to have `-' as the first
character.
<b>ADDRESS REWRITING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="address_rewriting_controls">ADDRESS REWRITING CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#myorigin">myorigin</a> ($<a href="postconf.5.html#myhostname">myhostname</a>)</b>
The domain name that locally-posted mail appears to come from,
and that locally posted mail is delivered to.
@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8) TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8)
<a href="postconf.5.html#remote_header_rewrite_domain">remote_header_rewrite_domain</a> parameter, and adding missing head-
ers.
<b>ROUTING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="routing_controls">ROUTING CONTROLS</a></b>
The following is applicable to Postfix version 2.0 and later. Earlier
versions do not have support for: <a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_transport">virtual_transport</a>, <a href="postconf.5.html#relay_transport">relay_transport</a>,
<a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_alias_domains">virtual_alias_domains</a>, <a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_mailbox_domains">virtual_mailbox_domains</a> or <a href="postconf.5.html#proxy_interfaces">proxy_interfaces</a>.
@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8) TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8)
A sender-dependent override for the global <a href="postconf.5.html#default_transport">default_transport</a>
parameter setting.
<b>ADDRESS VERIFICATION CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="address_verification_controls">ADDRESS VERIFICATION CONTROLS</a></b>
Postfix version 2.1 introduces sender and recipient address verifica-
tion. This feature is implemented by sending probe email messages that
are not actually delivered. By default, address verification probes
@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8) TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8)
Overrides the <a href="postconf.5.html#sender_dependent_default_transport_maps">sender_dependent_default_transport_maps</a> parameter
setting for address verification probes.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8) TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#service_name">service_name</a> (read-only)</b>
The <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> service name of a Postfix daemon process.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="transport.5.html">transport(5)</a>, transport table format
<a href="relocated.5.html">relocated(5)</a>, format of the "user has moved" table
@ -314,11 +314,11 @@ TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8) TRIVIAL-REWRITE(8)
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="ADDRESS_CLASS_README.html">ADDRESS_CLASS_README</a>, Postfix address classes howto
<a href="ADDRESS_VERIFICATION_README.html">ADDRESS_VERIFICATION_README</a>, Postfix address verification
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

32
postfix/html/verify.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
VERIFY(8) VERIFY(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
verify - Postfix address verification server
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>verify</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="verify.8.html"><b>verify</b>(8)</a> address verification server maintains a record of what
recipient addresses are known to be deliverable or undeliverable.
@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ VERIFY(8) VERIFY(8)
status is unknown, a probe is sent and an "in progress" status
is returned.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The address verification server is not security-sensitive. It does not
talk to the network, and it does not talk to local users. The verify
server can run chrooted at fixed low privilege.
@ -58,10 +58,10 @@ VERIFY(8) VERIFY(8)
directory is redirected to the Postfix-owned <b><a href="postconf.5.html#data_directory">data_directory</a></b>, and a
warning is logged.
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Problems and transactions are logged to <b>syslogd</b>(8) or <a href="postlogd.8.html"><b>postlogd</b>(8)</a>.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
Address verification probe messages add additional traffic to the mail
queue. Recipient verification may cause an increased load on
down-stream servers in the case of a dictionary attack or a flood of
@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ VERIFY(8) VERIFY(8)
an end and human intervention is needed. This violates a basic Postfix
principle.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are not picked up automatically, as <a href="verify.8.html"><b>verify</b>(8)</a> pro-
cesses are long-lived. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>" after a config-
uration change.
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ VERIFY(8) VERIFY(8)
The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for
more details including examples.
<b>PROBE MESSAGE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="probe_message_controls">PROBE MESSAGE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#address_verify_sender">address_verify_sender</a> ($<a href="postconf.5.html#double_bounce_sender">double_bounce_sender</a>)</b>
The sender address to use in address verification probes; prior
to Postfix 2.5 the default was "postmaster".
@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ VERIFY(8) VERIFY(8)
The time between changes in the time-dependent portion of
address verification probe sender addresses.
<b>CACHE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="cache_controls">CACHE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#address_verify_map">address_verify_map</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
Lookup table for persistent address verification status storage.
@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ VERIFY(8) VERIFY(8)
The amount of time between <a href="verify.8.html"><b>verify</b>(8)</a> address verification data-
base cleanup runs.
<b>PROBE MESSAGE ROUTING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="probe_message_routing_controls">PROBE MESSAGE ROUTING CONTROLS</a></b>
By default, probe messages are delivered via the same route as regular
messages. The following parameters can be used to override specific
message routing mechanisms.
@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ VERIFY(8) VERIFY(8)
Overrides the <a href="postconf.5.html#sender_dependent_default_transport_maps">sender_dependent_default_transport_maps</a> parameter
setting for address verification probes.
<b>SMTPUTF8 CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="smtputf8_controls">SMTPUTF8 CONTROLS</a></b>
Preliminary SMTPUTF8 support is introduced with Postfix 3.0.
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#smtputf8_autodetect_classes">smtputf8_autodetect_classes</a> (sendmail, verify)</b>
@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ VERIFY(8) VERIFY(8)
IDNA2008, when converting UTF-8 domain names to/from the ASCII
form that is used for DNS lookups.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -211,20 +211,20 @@ VERIFY(8) VERIFY(8)
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#service_name">service_name</a> (read-only)</b>
The <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> service name of a Postfix daemon process.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="smtpd.8.html">smtpd(8)</a>, Postfix SMTP server
<a href="cleanup.8.html">cleanup(8)</a>, enqueue Postfix message
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="ADDRESS_VERIFICATION_README.html">ADDRESS_VERIFICATION_README</a>, address verification howto
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
This service was introduced with Postfix version 2.1.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

32
postfix/html/virtual.5.html
View File

@ -7,17 +7,17 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
VIRTUAL(5) VIRTUAL(5)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
virtual - Postfix virtual alias table format
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>postmap /etc/postfix/virtual</b>
<b>postmap -q "</b><i>string</i><b>" /etc/postfix/virtual</b>
<b>postmap -q - /etc/postfix/virtual</b> &lt;<i>inputfile</i>
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The optional <a href="virtual.5.html"><b>virtual</b>(5)</a> alias table (<a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_alias_maps">virtual_alias_maps</a>) applies to all
recipients: <a href="local.8.html">local(8)</a>, virtual, and remote. This feature is implemented
in the Postfix <a href="cleanup.8.html"><b>cleanup</b>(8)</a> daemon before mail is queued. These tables
@ -61,13 +61,13 @@ VIRTUAL(5) VIRTUAL(5)
a slightly different way as described below under "REGULAR EXPRESSION
TABLES" or "TCP-BASED TABLES".
<b>CASE FOLDING</b>
<b><a name="case_folding">CASE FOLDING</a></b>
The search string is folded to lowercase before database lookup. As of
Postfix 2.3, the search string is not case folded with database types
such as <a href="regexp_table.5.html">regexp</a>: or <a href="pcre_table.5.html">pcre</a>: whose lookup fields can match both upper and
lower case.
<b>TABLE FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="table_format">TABLE FORMAT</a></b>
The input format for the <a href="postmap.1.html"><b>postmap</b>(1)</a> command is as follows:
<i>pattern address, address, ...</i>
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ VIRTUAL(5) VIRTUAL(5)
A logical line starts with non-whitespace text. A line that
starts with whitespace continues a logical line.
<b>TABLE SEARCH ORDER</b>
<b><a name="table_search_order">TABLE SEARCH ORDER</a></b>
With lookups from indexed files such as DB or DBM, or from networked
tables such as NIS, LDAP or SQL, each <i>user</i>@<i>domain</i> query produces a
sequence of query patterns as described below.
@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ VIRTUAL(5) VIRTUAL(5)
In the above example, Postfix may contact a remote server if the
recipient is aliased to a remote address.
<b>RESULT ADDRESS REWRITING</b>
<b><a name="result_address_rewriting">RESULT ADDRESS REWRITING</a></b>
The lookup result is subject to address rewriting:
<b>o</b> When the result has the form @<i>otherdomain</i>, the result becomes
@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ VIRTUAL(5) VIRTUAL(5)
<b>o</b> When "<b><a href="postconf.5.html#append_dot_mydomain">append_dot_mydomain</a>=yes</b>", append "<b>.$<a href="postconf.5.html#mydomain">mydomain</a></b>" to addresses
without ".domain".
<b>ADDRESS EXTENSION</b>
<b><a name="address_extension">ADDRESS EXTENSION</a></b>
When a mail address localpart contains the optional recipient delimiter
(e.g., <i>user+foo</i>@<i>domain</i>), the lookup order becomes: <i>user+foo</i>@<i>domain</i>,
<i>user</i>@<i>domain</i>, <i>user+foo</i>, <i>user</i>, and @<i>domain</i>.
@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ VIRTUAL(5) VIRTUAL(5)
unmatched address extension (<i>+foo</i>) is propagated to the result of a ta-
ble lookup.
<b>VIRTUAL ALIAS DOMAINS</b>
<b><a name="virtual_alias_domains">VIRTUAL ALIAS DOMAINS</a></b>
Besides virtual aliases, the virtual alias table can also be used to
implement <a href="ADDRESS_CLASS_README.html#virtual_alias_class">virtual alias domains</a>. With a virtual alias domain, all
recipient addresses are aliased to addresses in other domains.
@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ VIRTUAL(5) VIRTUAL(5)
<b>tual_alias_domains</a></b> configuration parameter. This latter parameter uses
the same syntax as the <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</a> <a href="postconf.5.html#mydestination">mydestination</a></b> configuration parameter.
<b>REGULAR EXPRESSION TABLES</b>
<b><a name="regular_expression_tables">REGULAR EXPRESSION TABLES</a></b>
This section describes how the table lookups change when the table is
given in the form of regular expressions. For a description of regular
expression lookup table syntax, see <a href="regexp_table.5.html"><b>regexp_table</b>(5)</a> or <a href="pcre_table.5.html"><b>pcre_table</b>(5)</a>.
@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ VIRTUAL(5) VIRTUAL(5)
feature that parenthesized substrings from the pattern can be interpo-
lated as <b>$1</b>, <b>$2</b> and so on.
<b>TCP-BASED TABLES</b>
<b><a name="tcp-based_tables">TCP-BASED TABLES</a></b>
This section describes how the table lookups change when lookups are
directed to a TCP-based server. For a description of the TCP
client/server lookup protocol, see <a href="tcp_table.5.html"><b>tcp_table</b>(5)</a>. This feature is
@ -224,10 +224,10 @@ VIRTUAL(5) VIRTUAL(5)
Results are the same as with indexed file lookups.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
The table format does not understand quoting conventions.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
The following <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> parameters are especially relevant to this topic.
See the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> file for syntax details and for default values.
Use the "<b>postfix reload</b>" command after a configuration change.
@ -273,18 +273,18 @@ VIRTUAL(5) VIRTUAL(5)
receives mail on by way of a proxy or network address transla-
tion unit.
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="cleanup.8.html">cleanup(8)</a>, canonicalize and enqueue mail
<a href="postmap.1.html">postmap(1)</a>, Postfix lookup table manager
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="canonical.5.html">canonical(5)</a>, canonical address mapping
<b>README FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README FILES</a></b>
<a href="ADDRESS_REWRITING_README.html">ADDRESS_REWRITING_README</a>, address rewriting guide
<a href="DATABASE_README.html">DATABASE_README</a>, Postfix lookup table overview
<a href="VIRTUAL_README.html">VIRTUAL_README</a>, domain hosting guide
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>AUTHOR(S)</b>

44
postfix/html/virtual.8.html
View File

@ -7,13 +7,13 @@
</head> <body> <pre>
VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
<b>NAME</b>
<b><a name="name">NAME</a></b>
virtual - Postfix virtual domain mail delivery agent
<b>SYNOPSIS</b>
<b><a name="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a></b>
<b>virtual</b> [generic Postfix daemon options]
<b>DESCRIPTION</b>
<b><a name="description">DESCRIPTION</a></b>
The <a href="virtual.8.html"><b>virtual</b>(8)</a> delivery agent is designed for virtual mail hosting ser-
vices. Originally based on the Postfix <a href="local.8.html"><b>local</b>(8)</a> delivery agent, this
agent looks up recipients with map lookups of their full recipient
@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
forwarding, out-of-office notifications, etc., must be configured via
virtual_alias maps or via similar lookup mechanisms.
<b>MAILBOX LOCATION</b>
<b><a name="mailbox_location">MAILBOX LOCATION</a></b>
The mailbox location is controlled by the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_mailbox_base">virtual_mailbox_base</a></b> and <b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_mailbox_maps">vir</a>-</b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_mailbox_maps">tual_mailbox_maps</a></b> configuration parameters (see below). The <b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_mailbox_maps">vir-</b>
<b>tual_mailbox_maps</a></b> table is indexed by the recipient address as
@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
where <i>recipient</i> is the full recipient address.
<b>UNIX MAILBOX FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="unix_mailbox_format">UNIX MAILBOX FORMAT</a></b>
When the mailbox location does not end in <b>/</b>, the message is delivered
in UNIX mailbox format. This format stores multiple messages in one
textfile.
@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
progress. In case of problems, an attempt is made to truncate the mail-
box to its original length.
<b>QMAIL MAILDIR FORMAT</b>
<b><a name="qmail_maildir_format">QMAIL MAILDIR FORMAT</a></b>
When the mailbox location ends in <b>/</b>, the message is delivered in qmail
<b>maildir</b> format. This format stores one message per file.
@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
By definition, <b>maildir</b> format does not require application-level file
locking during mail delivery or retrieval.
<b>MAILBOX OWNERSHIP</b>
<b><a name="mailbox_ownership">MAILBOX OWNERSHIP</a></b>
Mailbox ownership is controlled by the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_uid_maps">virtual_uid_maps</a></b> and <b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_gid_maps">vir</a>-</b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_gid_maps">tual_gid_maps</a></b> lookup tables, which are indexed with the full recipient
address. Each table provides a string with the numerical user and group
@ -73,12 +73,12 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
The <b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_minimum_uid">virtual_minimum_uid</a></b> parameter imposes a lower bound on numerical
user ID values that may be specified in any <b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_uid_maps">virtual_uid_maps</a></b>.
<b>CASE FOLDING</b>
<b><a name="case_folding">CASE FOLDING</a></b>
All delivery decisions are made using the full recipient address,
folded to lower case. See also the next section for a few exceptions
with optional address extensions.
<b>TABLE SEARCH ORDER</b>
<b><a name="table_search_order">TABLE SEARCH ORDER</a></b>
Normally, a lookup table is specified as a text file that serves as
input to the <a href="postmap.1.html"><b>postmap</b>(1)</a> command. The result, an indexed file in <b>dbm</b> or
<b>db</b> format, is used for fast searching by the mail system.
@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
where patterns are given as regular expressions. In that case, only the
full recipient address is given to the regular-expression map.
<b>SECURITY</b>
<b><a name="security">SECURITY</a></b>
The <a href="virtual.8.html"><b>virtual</b>(8)</a> delivery agent is not security sensitive, provided that
the lookup tables with recipient user/group ID information are ade-
quately protected. This program is not designed to run chrooted.
@ -118,10 +118,10 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
Postfix version 2.2, the virtual delivery agent will terminate with a
fatal error.
<b>STANDARDS</b>
<b><a name="standards">STANDARDS</a></b>
<a href="https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc822">RFC 822</a> (ARPA Internet Text Messages)
<b>DIAGNOSTICS</b>
<b><a name="diagnostics">DIAGNOSTICS</a></b>
Mail bounces when the recipient has no mailbox or when the recipient is
over disk quota. In all other problem cases, mail for an existing
recipient is deferred and a warning is logged.
@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
Depending on the setting of the <b><a href="postconf.5.html#notify_classes">notify_classes</a></b> parameter, the postmas-
ter is notified of bounces and of other trouble.
<b>BUGS</b>
<b><a name="bugs">BUGS</a></b>
This delivery agent supports address extensions in email addresses and
in lookup table keys, but does not propagate address extension informa-
tion to the result of table lookup.
@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
attributes. In order to avoid the inconvenience of maintaining three
tables, use an LDAP or MYSQL database.
<b>CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</b>
<b><a name="configuration_parameters">CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS</a></b>
Changes to <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>main.cf</b></a> are picked up automatically, as <a href="virtual.8.html"><b>virtual</b>(8)</a> processes
run for only a limited amount of time. Use the command "<b>postfix reload</b>"
to speed up a change.
@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
The text below provides only a parameter summary. See <a href="postconf.5.html"><b>postconf</b>(5)</a> for
more details including examples.
<b>MAILBOX DELIVERY CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="mailbox_delivery_controls">MAILBOX DELIVERY CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_mailbox_base">virtual_mailbox_base</a> (empty)</b>
A prefix that the <a href="virtual.8.html"><b>virtual</b>(8)</a> delivery agent prepends to all
pathname results from $<a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_mailbox_maps">virtual_mailbox_maps</a> table lookups.
@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
Defer delivery when a mailbox file is not owned by its recipi-
ent.
<b>LOCKING CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="locking_controls">LOCKING CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_mailbox_lock">virtual_mailbox_lock</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
How to lock a UNIX-style <a href="virtual.8.html"><b>virtual</b>(8)</a> mailbox before attempting
delivery.
@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
The time after which a stale exclusive mailbox lockfile is
removed.
<b>RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="resource_and_rate_controls">RESOURCE AND RATE CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#virtual_mailbox_limit">virtual_mailbox_limit</a> (51200000)</b>
The maximal size in bytes of an individual <a href="virtual.8.html"><b>virtual</b>(8)</a> mailbox or
maildir file, or zero (no limit).
@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
The maximal number of recipients per message for the virtual
message delivery transport.
<b>MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</b>
<b><a name="miscellaneous_controls">MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS</a></b>
<b><a href="postconf.5.html#config_directory">config_directory</a> (see 'postconf -d' output)</b>
The default location of the Postfix <a href="postconf.5.html">main.cf</a> and <a href="master.5.html">master.cf</a> con-
figuration files.
@ -286,22 +286,22 @@ VIRTUAL(8) VIRTUAL(8)
The email address form that will be used in non-debug logging
(info, warning, etc.).
<b>SEE ALSO</b>
<b><a name="see_also">SEE ALSO</a></b>
<a href="qmgr.8.html">qmgr(8)</a>, queue manager
<a href="bounce.8.html">bounce(8)</a>, delivery status reports
<a href="postconf.5.html">postconf(5)</a>, configuration parameters
<a href="postlogd.8.html">postlogd(8)</a>, Postfix logging
syslogd(8), system logging
<b>README_FILES</b>
<b><a name="readme_files">README_FILES</a></b>
Use "<b>postconf <a href="postconf.5.html#readme_directory">readme_directory</a></b>" or
"<b>postconf <a href="postconf.5.html#html_directory">html_directory</a></b>" to locate this information.
<a href="VIRTUAL_README.html">VIRTUAL_README</a>, domain hosting howto
<b>LICENSE</b>
<b><a name="license">LICENSE</a></b>
The Secure Mailer license must be distributed with this software.
<b>HISTORY</b>
<b><a name="history">HISTORY</a></b>
This delivery agent was originally based on the Postfix local delivery
agent. Modifications mainly consisted of removing code that either was
not applicable or that was not safe in this context: aliases,

2
postfix/proto/stop.spell-history
View File

@ -83,3 +83,5 @@ Dilyan
Palauzov
pkgconf
testfiles
Antonin
Verrier

2
postfix/src/global/mail_version.h
View File

@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
* Patches change both the patchlevel and the release date. Snapshots have no
* patchlevel; they change the release date only.
*/
#define MAIL_RELEASE_DATE "20240928"
#define MAIL_RELEASE_DATE "20240930"
#define MAIL_VERSION_NUMBER "3.10"
#ifdef SNAPSHOT

12
postfix/src/smtpd/smtpd_check.c
View File

@ -4680,13 +4680,11 @@ static int generic_checks(SMTPD_STATE *state, ARGV *restrictions,
cpp[1], CHECK_RELAY_DOMAINS);
} else if (strcasecmp(name, PERMIT_SASL_AUTH) == 0) {
#ifdef USE_SASL_AUTH
if (smtpd_sasl_is_active(state)) {
status = permit_sasl_auth(state,
SMTPD_CHECK_OK, SMTPD_CHECK_DUNNO);
if (status == SMTPD_CHECK_OK)
status = smtpd_acl_permit(state, name, SMTPD_NAME_CLIENT,
state->namaddr, NO_PRINT_ARGS);
}
status = permit_sasl_auth(state,
SMTPD_CHECK_OK, SMTPD_CHECK_DUNNO);
if (status == SMTPD_CHECK_OK)
status = smtpd_acl_permit(state, name, SMTPD_NAME_CLIENT,
state->namaddr, NO_PRINT_ARGS);
#endif
} else if (strcasecmp(name, PERMIT_TLS_ALL_CLIENTCERTS) == 0) {
status = permit_tls_clientcerts(state, 1);